Hipath 4000 Hipath 4500: Initial Installation/Startup

s
HiPath 4000
HiPath 4500
Initial Installation/Startup
Installation Instructions
*1PP31003-H3110-M120-2-7631
(I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.)*
1P P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.)
The information in this document contains only general descriptions or general fea-
tures, which may not be available as described for actual application and/or which can
change due to further product development.
The desired features are therefore only binding if formally specified at the closing of
contract.
The device conforms to the EU guideline 1999/5/EG, as attested by the CE

mark.
This device has been manufactured in accordance with our certified envi-
ronmental management system (ISO 14001). This process ensures that en-
ergy consumption and the use of primary raw materials are kept to a mini-
mum, thus reducing waste production.
 Siemens AG 2002 ● Information and Communication Networks, Hofmannstraße 51, D-81359 München
Reference No.: P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.)
Printen in the Federal Republic of Germany. 2002 EA 0802
●
Subject to availability. Right of modification reserved.

montbuchIVZ.fm
Contents
Contents 0
1 Important Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Special Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2.1 Safety Information: Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2.2 Safety Information: Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.2.3 Safety Information: Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.2.4 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.2.5 Behavior in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.2.6 Accident Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.3 Data Protection and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.4 UL and CSA Standards, U.S. and Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.4.1 UL 60960 and CSA C22.2 No. 60960-00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.5 FCC and Industry Canada Compliance, U.S. and Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.5.1 FCC Registration and Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.5.1.1 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.5.1.2 FCC Rules, Part 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.5.1.3 FCC Rules, Part 68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.5.2 Industry Canada Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.5.2.1 Equipment Attachment Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.5.2.2 Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.6 About This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.6.1 How to Use This Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.6.2 Prerequisite Knowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.6.3 Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.6.4 Updates to this Manual, U.S.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.7 Documentation Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.1 AC-Powered, Non-Redundant HiPath 4500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.1.1 CCDAX Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1.1.2 Duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.1.3 Simplex Dual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.1.4 Simplex Mono . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.1.5 LTUW Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.1.2 AC-Powered, Redundant HiPath 4500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.1.3 DC-Powered, Redundant HiPath 4500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.2 Switching Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.2.1 Common Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.2.2 Switching Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.2.3 Service Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.3 Telephony Shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.4 External Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

HiPath 4500, V1.0, Installation Instructions 0-3
montbuchIVZ.fm
Contents
2.4.1 Administrative Data Processor (ADP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

2.4.1.1 Commissioning the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.4.1.2 Direct AMO Dialog (DAD) Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.4.1.3 Remote Maintenance and Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.4.1.4 Local Maintenance Terminal Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.1.5 Call Detail Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.1.6 Traffic Metering and Statistics Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.1.7 System Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.1.8 RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.1.9 HSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.5 Internal Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.5.1 Internal Server Common Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
3 Preparing for Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Installation Procedures Matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Installation Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3 Conducting the Site Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.4 Receiving the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.5 Inspecting for Shipping Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.6 Removing the System from its Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.7 Removing a System with a Roller Base from the Pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.8 Positioning the Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.9 Leveling the Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.10 Removing the Front Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.11 Removing the Back Covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.12 Important Labels on the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.13 Inventorying the System Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.14 Inventorying the System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.15 Inventorying the Installation Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.16 Performing Pre-Installation Trunk Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.17 Installing Seismic Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.18 Stacking HiPath 4000 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.19 Installing the Cable Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
4 Special Installation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Removing 24-Port Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.1 SIVAPAC-to-SIPAC Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.2 Installing the Adapter 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2 Network Strips, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.1 Installing 16DA Splitting Strips on a New Main Distribution Frame, I.M. . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.2 Installing 24DA Splitting Strips on an Old Main Distribution Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
5 Installation Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Multiple Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 AC-to-DC Power Box Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.3 DC-to-DC Power Box Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

0-4 HiPath 4500, V1.0, Installation Instructions
montbuchIVZ.fm
Contents
5.4 Free-Standing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

5.5 Cabling Diagram, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.6 Cabinet Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.6.1 CCDAX Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.6.1.1 Duplex Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.6.1.2 Simplex Dual Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.6.1.3 Simplex Mono Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.6.2 Unit Peripheral Redundant Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.6.3 Unit Peripheral Non-Redundant Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.6.4 Redundant Power Box Stacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.7 MDFHX 6 Mounting Location, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.8 MDFHX 8 Mounting Location, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
6 Grounding the HiPath 4500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1 Grounding the MDF, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 Connecting and Grounding the Cabinets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.1 Grounding the Base Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2.2 Installing the Ground Straps Between Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3 Grounding the System, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.4 Grounding the System, U.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.5 System Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
7 Connecting the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Connecting to the Mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.1 Connecting to the Mains By Means of LPSUC/LPC80 Power Supply Units . . . . . 7-3
7.1.2 Connecting to the Mains By Means of the Power Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.2 Installing a Three-Phase Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.3 Installing a Single-Phase Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.4 Overview of Network Connection 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.5 Installing a Three-Phase or Single-Phase Connection with Mid-Point Grounding, I.M. 7-8
7.6 Overview of Network Connection 2, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.7 Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.8 AC Connection with an L80XF Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.9 DC Connection with an L80XF Module, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.10 AC-to-DC Connection with a Redundant LTUW Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7.11 DC Connection with a Redundant LTUW Cabinet, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.11.1 Connecting the Battery to the Power Box, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7.11.2 Connecting the MDF for a Non-Redundant, System, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.12 UACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.12.1 UACD Equipment Part Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7.12.2 Connections for UACD 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
7.12.3 Connections for UACD 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7.13 UDCD, North America Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
7.13.1 UDCD Equipment Part Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7.13.2 Overview of Connections for UDCD Stack 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuchIVZ.fm
Contents
7.14 Connecting the Power Box to the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

7.14.1 Connecting the MDF for a Redundant System, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7.15 PSDXE Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7.16 Calculating the Battery Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
8 Installing Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Installing Signal Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1.1 Overview of CCDAX to L80XF/LTUW Simplex Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.1.2 Overview of CCDAX to L80XF/LTUW Duplex Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.1.3 Overview of CCDAX Periphery Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8.2 Routing the Power Cables on an AC-Powered, Non-Redundant HiPath 4500. . . . . . . 8-9
8.3 Routing the Power Cables on an AC-Powered, Redundant HiPath 4500. . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.4 Routing the Power Cables from the UACD and UDCD to the HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . 8-13
8.5 Connecting to the LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8.6 Installing the Service Alarm Cable and Trunk Bypass on the HiPath 4500 . . . . . . . . 8-13
9 External Cabling Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1 MDFHX6 Main Distribution Frame Assembly, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2 Cabling from the LTU to the MDF, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.3 Overvoltage Protection of the Modules, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.4 MDF Cable Connections, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.5 Connecting the Signal or Alarm Cables to the MDF, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.6 Subscriber Line or Trunk Module Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.6.1 Subscriber Line Module Part Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.6.1.1 Connecting the Subscriber Line Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.6.2 Trunk Module Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9.6.2.1 Connecting the Trunk Modules to the MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
9.6.2.2 Connection to MDF with DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
9.6.2.3 Connecting to the MDF with CDR and DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
9.6.2.4 Connecting to the MDF with CDR but without DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
9.7 Connecting CMI Fuse Modules, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
9.8 Creating a Strapping List, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
9.8.1 System Assignment 16/24 DA Splitting Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9.8.2 Network Assignment 25/35 DA Strapping Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
10 Installing Peripheral Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1 Installing the AC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.1.1 Verifying the Site Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.1.2 Installing the AC4 Handset Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10.1.3 Installing the AC Cables to the Controller Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10.1.4 Installing the AC4 Keyboard Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10.1.5 Cabling of the AC4 Attendant Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.1.6 Connecting the AC4 to the UAE6 Terminal Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
10.1.7 AC4 Ordering Packages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
10.1.8 AC4 Order Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.1.9 Connecting the AC4 to the UCON (World) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuchIVZ.fm
Contents
10.1.10 Powering On the AC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

10.2 Connecting the Internal Clock Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10.3 Connecting the MO Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
10.4 Connecting the Service Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
10.5 Connecting to Teleservice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
10.5.1 Connecting HiPath Teleservice By Means of SLMA/TM... Module . . . . . . . . . 10-16
10.5.2 Connecting HiPath Teleservice By Means of a LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
10.6 Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
10.6.1 Connecting ATM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
10.6.1.1 Direct Networking of Two HiPath 4000 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
10.6.1.2 Networking Several HiPath 4000 Systems By Means of an ATM Switch. 10-20
10.6.1.3 Laying the Fiber Optic Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
10.6.2 Connecting a Data Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
10.6.3 Connecting External Devices for Teleworking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
10.6.4 Connecting ISDN Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
10.6.4.1 PNE / PBXXX Back to Back with Modem and DIUN2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
10.6.4.2 PNE / PBXXX Back to Back with Modem and with DIUN2. . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
10.6.4.3 PNE / PBXXX Back to Back in Single Card BOX with DIUN2 . . . . . . . . . 10-27
10.6.4.4 PNE / PBXXX Back to Back with Modem in DIUS2 Emulation with DIUN2 10-28
10.6.4.5 CDG / PBXXX as Gateway, Fully Integrated Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
10.6.4.6 CDG / PBXXX with DIUN2 as Gateway, Partially Integrated Mode . . . . . 10-29
10.6.5 Cordless Multicell Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
10.6.5.1 CMI (V2.1/UP0/E) Network Local Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
10.7 Installing the Breakout Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
10.8 Installing the Custom Callout Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
10.8.1 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
10.8.2 CCA II Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
10.8.3 CCA II LED Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
10.8.4 CCA II Cable Connection Table and Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
10.8.5 Installing the CCAII Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
10.8.6 Installing the CCAII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
10.8.7 Connecting the CCA II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
10.9 Installing the Distance Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
10.10 Installing and Configuring the HiPath ProCenter Server Message Stream . . . . . 10-44
10.11 Installing the Music-on-Hold Interface Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
10.12 Installing the Optiset E Adapter Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
11 Installing the HG 3800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.2 Pre-installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.3 Connecting the HG 3800 to the HiPath 4500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.3.1 HG 3800 Hardware: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11.3.2 HG 3800 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.3.3 HG 3800 Connection Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11.3.4 Installing the HG 3800 Controller Desk Top Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuchIVZ.fm
Contents
11.3.5 Installing the HG 3800 Controller Rack Mount Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

11.3.6 Installing the HG 3800 Controller Fiber Optic Link Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
11.3.7 Installing the HG 3800 Controller Cross-Connect Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
11.3.8 Installing the HG 3800 Controller Cables on the HiPath 4000 Site . . . . . . . . . 11-15
11.3.9 Installing the HG 3800 Controller Cables on the Telephony Cabinet Site . . . . 11-16
11.3.10 Setting the HG 3800 Controller Switch Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
11.4 Turning on the HG 3800 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
11.5 Configuring the HG 3800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
12 Installing the IPDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.2 IPDA Installation Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.2.1 Free-standing IPDA AP 3500/3505 IP Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
12.2.2 Standard 19-Inch AP 3500/3505 IP Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
12.2.3 IPDA 19-Inch Base Cabinet Shelf Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.2.4 IPDA 19-Inch Expansion Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.2.5 Patch Panel Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.2.5.1 External Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.2.5.2 Internes Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
12.3 Grounding the HiPath AP 3500 IP/AP 3505 IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
12.4 AC connections of the IPDA system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
12.5 Connecting HiPath AP 3500 IP/AP 3505 IP to the Mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
12.6 Connecting the PSDSC and LUNA to the Mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
12.7 Internal Cabling of the IPDA 19-Inch System (AP3500/3505 IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
13 Starting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.1 Completing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.2 Pre-Power On Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.2.1 Reseating the Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.2.2 Checking the Signal Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.2.3 Checking the Power Distribution Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.3 Turning On a Non-Redundant AC-Powered HiPath 4500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.4 Turning On Cabinets 1 and 2 of a Redundant AC-Powered HiPath 4500 . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.5 Turning On Cabinet 3 and 4 of a Redundant AC-Powered HiPath 4500 . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.6 Turning On Cabinet 1 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
13.10 Installing PROCOMM PLUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13.11 Enabling Clock Batteries on the DSCX and DPC5 Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13.12 Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13.13 Installing the Customer Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13.13.1 Factory-Generated Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13.13.2 Site-Generated Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13.14 Starting the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuchIVZ.fm
Contents
13.15 Connecting to the TAP, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

13.16 Running the Dongle Code Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
13.16.1 Checking the Ring Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
13.17 Replacing the Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
14 Verifying the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.1 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.2 Checking the Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.3 Checking the Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.4 Verifying the AC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14.5 Testing the Maintenance Terminal for the Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
14.6 Checking and Testing the Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
14.7 Testing the Restart and Failure Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
14.8 Backing up the Customer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
14.9 Setting and Activating the HTS Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
14.10 Verifying the Ring Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
14.11 Verifying the Station-to-MDF Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
14.12 Verifying Transmission Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
14.12.1 Balancing Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
14.12.2 Choosing the Balance Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
14.12.3 Selecting the Balance Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
14.12.3.1 Balancing CO Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
14.12.3.2 Balancing DID Trunks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
14.12.3.3 Balancing OPS Lines and Trunks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
14.12.4 Verifying ISDN Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
14.12.5 Verifying T1 Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
14.12.6 Recording Circuit IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
14.13 Verifying the MO-Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
14.14 Verifying the Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
14.15 Verifying the Operation of System Features and Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
14.15.1 HG 3800 Routing Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
14.15.1.1 HG 3800 Internal Server Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
14.15.1.2 HG 3800 Server Trunk Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
14.15.2 Testing CDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
14.15.3 Testing Least-Cost Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23
14.15.4 Testing PhoneMail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25
14.16 Verifying the System Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25
14.17 Customer Training, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26
15 Adding Cabinets to the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
15.1 Expansion Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
15.2 Connecting the Cabinet Stacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuchIVZ.fm
Contents
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuchhist.fm
History Changes, U. S.
History Changes, U. S. 0
Revision Number Date Summary

00 March 2002 Initial Publication
01 June 2002 Incorporated technical comments to various pages
of the manual.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuchhist.fm
History Changes, U. S.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch01.fm
Important Notices
Safety Information
1 Important Notices
1.1 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Special Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2.1 Safety Information: Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2.2 Safety Information: Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.2.3 Safety Information: Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.2.4 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.2.5 Behavior in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.2.6 Accident Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.3 Data Protection and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.4 UL and CSA Standards, U.S. and Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.4.1 UL 60960 and CSA C22.2 No. 60960-00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.5 FCC and Industry Canada Compliance, U.S. and Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.5.1 FCC Registration and Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.5.1.1 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.5.1.2 FCC Rules, Part 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.5.1.3 FCC Rules, Part 68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.5.2 Industry Canada Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.5.2.1 Equipment Attachment Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.5.2.2 Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.6 About This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.6.1 How to Use This Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.6.2 Prerequisite Knowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.6.3 Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.6.4 Updates to this Manual, U.S.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.7 Documentation Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.1 Safety Information

The following information is aimed at service personnel and authorized specialists. Only these
persons are permitted to work on the installation.
Read through all information on the equipment carefully, and follow all safety information. Also
obtain information concerning the emergency numbers.
Only components authorized specifically for the system may be used in conjunction with
HiPath systems.
The storage of documents, descriptions, operating instructions or other flammable items is not
permitted in the systems.
In order to comply with fire safety standards and EMC requirements, HiPath systems must be
closed during operation. They may only be opened for short periods for installation and main-
tenance purposes.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch01.fm
Important Notices
Special Notices
Always contact your manager before starting any work where the necessary safety does not
appear to be present (e.g. hazards due to gas explosion or humidity).
1.2 Special Notices

Potentially dangerous situations are noted throughout this guide. The three alert methods are
defined below:
DANGER A danger notice calls attention to conditions that, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.
WARNING A warning notice calls attention to conditions that, if not avoided, could result
in death or serious injury.
Caution A caution notice calls attention to conditions that, if not avoided, may damage
or destroy hardware or software.
The symbol that appears with the alert indicates the type of dangerous situation to which the
alert calls attention. The symbols are defined below:
> 1 0 6 7 7 4
Information/ Electrical Fire Chemical General Weight Electrostatic
Note
2 3
Laser Heat
Fire safety requirements are set out in the construction regulations on a country-specific basis.
Valid regulations for the relevant country should be observed.
Cable construction for the HiPath system meets the international standard IEC 60332-1 *) for
flame propagation
The project planning and service division should ensure that this standard satisfies all of the
existing construction regulations and any additional regulations.
*)The following standards have the same requirements regarding flame propagation of cables.
IEC 60332-1 EN 50265-1 and VDE 0482 Part 265-1 and

EN 50265-2-1 VDE 0842 Part 265-2-1
Note:
IEC 60332-1 complies EN 50265-1 and -2-1 VDE 0482 Parts 265-1 and -2-1 replace
with the UL VW-1 test replace HD 405.1 VDE 0472 Part 804, test B
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch01.fm
Important Notices
Special Notices
1.2.1 Safety Information: Danger

● Before starting up the installation and connecting the subscribers, connect the installation
correctly with the protective earthing conductor.
Never operate the equipment with protective earthing conductor disconnected!
● Voltages above 30 V AC (alternating current) or 60 V DC (direct current) are dangerous.
● If the power cable appears to be damaged, replace it immediately.
● Immediately replace any damaged safety equipment (covers, labels and protective cables).
● If the maintenance work requires the power supply of the system to be shut down:
– Use the shut-off switch to disconnect the system from the power supply circuit, and se-
cure the shut-off device mechanically so that it cannot be used by other persons.
– Affix the information “DO NOT OPERATE” to the disconnect device.
A disconnect device can be a shut-off switch (main switch) or protective switch (fuse/
automatic cut out).
– Before starting any work on the installation, establish the location of the disconnect de-
vice.
● If you are performing work on circuits with hazardous voltages, always work together with
a partner who is familiar with the location of the switch for the power supply.
● Always ensure adequate insulation when touching powered circuits.
● Ensure that the installation is not powered by an additional power supply, or that it is pro-
tected via an additional fuse or an additional main switch.
● Before starting any work, check whether the corresponding circuits are still on power. Nev-
er take it for granted that all circuits have reliably been disconnected from the power supply
when a fuse or a main switch has been switched off.
● During a thunderstorm, you should not connect or remove telephone lines and PC boards.
● Expect to encounter leakage current from the telecommunication network.
● Ensure that, whenever work is carried out on an open installation, the installation is never
left unsupervised.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch01.fm
Important Notices
Special Notices
1.2.2 Safety Information: Warning

● There is the risk of an explosion if the lithium battery is not replaced correctly. The lithium
battery must be replaced only by the same or equivalent types recommended by the man-
ufacturer.
● Be aware of additional dangers with low voltages and large cross-sections. Cables with a
large cross-section generally have lower voltages, although the current strengths are high-
er. This results in particular risks, e.g. in the event of short circuits.
● When working on the installations, never wear loose clothing and always tie back long hair.
● Never wear jewelry, metal watch straps or for instance metal fittings and rivets on items of
clothing. There is a risk of injury and short circuit.
● The surface of a mirror is conductive! Never touch powered circuits with a mirror; you might
injure yourself and/or at least cause short-circuit damage.
● Always wear the necessary eye protection whenever appropriate.
● Always wear a protective helmet where falling objects might injure you.
● Always disconnect the power supply when you are working directly next to a power supply
unit or direct current converter, unless the work instructions expressly permit you to work
without having to shut off the power.
● Never try to lift heavy objects without assistance.
● In case of laser radiation: do not stare into the beam.
1.2.3 Safety Information: Caution

● Check the set nominal voltage of the installation (operating instructions and type plate).
● As long as the power supply is switched on, always observe the greatest caution when per-
forming measurements on powered components and maintenance work on plug-in cards,
PC boards and covers.
● To protect against the electrostatic discharge (ESD):
– Always wear the wristband before performing any work on PC boards and modules.
– Only transport PC boards in suitable protective packaging.
– Always place PC boards on a grounded conducting base, and do not process the PC
boards anywhere else.
● Only use grounded soldering irons.
● Only use tools and testers suitable for the job. Do not use broken tools and testers, inspect
them regularly.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch01.fm
Important Notices
Special Notices
● Find out the location of the main switch for the power supply of the system. Follow the ap-
propriate instructions.
● Install cables in such a way that they do not pose an accident risk (i.e. so that they do not
trip anybody up) and also so that they are not damaged.
1.2.4 General Information

● If the installation is brought into the operating premises from a cold environment, conden-
sation may occur. Wait until the temperature of the installation has adjusted to the ambient
temperature and until the installation is absolutely dry before you start it up.
● Before starting wall assembly, check whether the load-bearing capacity of the wall is ade-
quate, e.g. in the event of plasterboard walls.
● When maintenance work has been completed, always re-install all safety equipment in the
right place.
● Check your tools regularly. Only use intact tools.
● Close the doors after test and maintenance work has been completed.
● All cables and lines which leave a system cabinet must be screened at least between the
connection point in the cabinet and the point at which the cable leaves the cabinet.
Use a clip and pressure screw to contact all screen fabric to the cabinet outlet. This is also
applicable for permanently connected service equipment.
● Connect all cables only to the specified connection points.
● Do not install any external modems in the installation cabinets.
● Do not allow readily flammable materials to be stored near the installation or in the instal-
lation room.
● Ensure good lighting at the workplace.
● Untidiness at the workplace involves the risk of injuries.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch01.fm
Important Notices
Special Notices
1.2.5 Behavior in Emergencies

● In the event of accidents, remain calm and considered.
● Always switch off the power supply before you touch an accident victim.
● If you are not able to immediately switch off the power supply, only touch the victim with
non-conducting materials (e.g. a broom handle made of wood), and first of all try to isolate
the victim from the power supply.
● You must be familiar with first-aid principles in the event of electricity injuries. An urgent
need in such emergencies is fundamental knowledge of the various methods of resuscita-
tion if the victim has stopped breathing or if the victim’s heart is no longer beating, as well
as first aid for treating burns.
● If the victim is not breathing, immediately perform mouth-to-mouth or mouth-to-nose resus-
citation.
● If you have appropriate training, immediately perform heart massage if the victim’s heart is
not beating.
● Immediately call an ambulance or the emergency doctor. Provide the following information
in the following sequence:
– Where did the accident take place?
– What has happened?
– How many injured?
– What type of injuries?
– Wait for queries.
1.2.6 Accident Reporting

● Immediately report all accidents, “near accidents” and potential sources of danger to your
manager.
● Report all electrical shocks, no matter how small.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch01.fm
Important Notices
Data Protection and Data
1.3 Data Protection and Data

This system also processes and uses personal data, e.g. for call charge metering purposes,
the displays and for recording user data.
In Germany, the processing and use of such personal data are subject to various regulations,
including the regulations of the Federal Data Protection Law (Bundesdatenschutzgesetz =
BDSG). For other countries, please follow the appropriate national laws.
The aim of data protection is to protect the rights of individuals being affected by use of his per-
sonal data.
In addition, the aim of data protection is to ensure that data are not corrupted when processed
and that one’s own interests and the interests of other parties which need to be protected are
not affected.
Members of Siemens AG staff are required to observe business and data secrecy as a result
of the company’s work rules.
In order to ensure that the statutory requirements during service - whether during “on-site ser-
vice” or during “tele service” - are consistently met, you should always observe the following
rules. You will not only maintain the interests of your/our customers, you will also avoid personal
consequences.
Contribute to the maintenance of data protection and data security with your conscious
action:
● Ensure that only appropriately authorized persons have access to customer data.
● Take full advantage of all options of allocating passwords; do not inform unauthorized per-
sons of passwords, e.g. by means of a written note.
● Ensure that no unauthorized person is able to process (store, modify, transmit, disable, de-
lete) or use customer data in any way.
● Prevent unauthorized persons from gaining access to data media, e.g. on backup disks or
protocol printouts. This is applicable for service calls as well as for storage and transport.
● Ensure that data media which are no longer required are completely destroyed. Ensure
that no papers remain generally available.
Work together with your contacts of the customer: this creates mutual confidence and
reduces your own workload.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch01.fm
Important Notices
UL and CSA Standards, U.S. and Canada
1.4 UL and CSA Standards, U.S. and Canada

Table 1-1describes the UL and CSA standards for the HiPath 4000.
Product UL 60950, CSA C22.2, No. 60950.00

HiPath 4000 ✔
Table 1-1 UL and CSA Standards
1.4.1 UL 60960 and CSA C22.2 No. 60960-00

This product is UL Listed to the requirements of UL Standard 60950, “Safety of Information
Technology Equipment”. This product is C-UL Listed to the requirements of CSA Standard
C22.2 No. 60950-00, “Safety of Information Technology Equipment.”
1.5 FCC and Industry Canada Compliance, U.S. and Canada

This section describes the requirements for compliance with Federal Communications Com-
mission (FCC) Rules and Industry Canada CS-03 standard for HiPath 4000.
1.5.1 FCC Registration and Requirements

The following paragraphs describe requirements and information based on FCC rules.
1.5.1.1 Service
If you experience problem with the Siemens HiPath 4000 model 4300 and 4500 products, con-
tact Siemens customer support at 1-800-TEL-ROLM for information on service or repairs. The
telephone company can ask you to disconnect the equipment from the network until the prob-
lem is corrected or until you are sure that the equipment is not malfunctioning.
1.5.1.2 FCC Rules, Part 15

The Siemens HiPath 4000 model 4300 and 4500 systems have been tested and comply with
the limits for a class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, can
cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residen-
tial area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct
the interference in the user’s expense.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch01.fm
Important Notices
FCC and Industry Canada Compliance, U.S. and Canada
1.5.1.3 FCC Rules, Part 68
FCC Part 68 Registration

The Siemens HiPath 4000 model 4300 and 4500 systems comply with FCC Rules, Part 68. At
the equipment cover of the system is a label contains, among other information, the FCC reg-
istration number. If requested, this information must be given to the telephone company.
REN
The ringer equivalence number (REN) is used to determine the quality of devices which may
be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the
devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of RENs
should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to
a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company.
The REN assigned to Siemens HiPath 4000 model 4300 and 4500 systems is 0.4B.
> If requested, this information must be given to the telephone company.
Facility Interface Information

In order to connect registered terminal equipment to the telephone company lines, the terminal
equipment must utilize FCC registered jacks. Standardized jacks are used for this equipment.
The following tables list facility interfaces, manufacturer’s network interface port designations,
RENs or service codes, and network jacks.
This table lists the network trunk interfaces for loop-start, ground-start and DID services.
Manufacturer Port Facility Interface Code (FIC) REN Network Jack

Identifier
TMC16 O2LS2 0.4B RJ21X
TMC16 O2GS2 0.4B RJ21X
TMDID O2RV2-T 0.0 RJ21X
This table lists the station interfaces for analog private line (PL) services.
Manufacturer Port Facility Interface Code (FIC) Service Order Code Network Jack
Identifier (SOC)
SLMA2(OPS) OL13B 9.0F RJ21X
TMEMUS TL31M 9.0F RJ2GX
TMEMUS TL31E 9.0F RJ2GX
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch01.fm
Important Notices
This table lists the network digital trunk interfaces for digital services.
Manufacturer Port Digital Interface Code (FIC) Service Order Code Network Jack
Identifier (SOC)
TMDNH O4DU9-BN 6.0P N/A *
TMDNH O4DU9-DN 6.0P N/A *
TMDNH O4DU9-1KN 6.0P N/A *
TMDNH O4DU9-1SN 6.0P N/A *
* The TMDNH interfaces are connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network through FCC registered Net-
work Communications Terminated Equipment (NCTE) which specifies the type of network jacks to be used.
This table lists the answer supervision code for network DID interfaces.
Manufacturer Port Facility Interface Code (FIC) Answer Supervision Network Jack
Identifier Code
TMDID O2RV-T AS.2 RJ21X
TMDNH O4DU9-BN AS.2 N/A *
TMDNH O4DU9-DN AS.2 N/A *
TMDNH O4DU9-1KN AS.2 N/A *
TMDNH O4DU9-1SN AS.2 N/A *
* The TMDNH interfaces are connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network through FCC registered Net-
work Communications Terminated Equipment (NCTE) which specifies the type of network jacks to be used.
Disruption of the Network

If the Siemens HiPath 4000 model 4300 and 4500 systems disrupt the telephone network, the
telephone company can discontinue your service temporarily. If possible, the telephone com-
pany will notify you in advance. If advance notice is not practical, they will notify you as soon as
possible. You are also informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
Telephone Company Facility Changes

The telephone company can make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or proce-
dures that can affect the operation of your equipment. If they do, you should be notified in ad-
vance so you have an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch01.fm
Important Notices
Nonlive Voice Equipment

Nonlive voice equipment such as music-on-hold devices and recorded announcers for systems
must be approved by Siemens and registered in accordance with the rules and regulations of
Subpart C of the FCC Rules, Part 68, or it must be connected through protective circuitry that
is approved by Siemens and registered in accordance with the rules and regulations in Subpart
C of the FCC Rules, Part 68.
Newly Established Network Area and Exchange Codes

The routing software features, which allows user access to the network, must be upgraded to
recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed in
service.
Failure to upgrade the premises systems or peripheral equipment to recognize the new codes
as they are established restricts the customers and the customer’s employees from gaining ac-
cess to the network and to these codes.
Equipment with Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Allowing the equipment to be operated in such a manner as to not provide for proper answer
supervision is a violation of Part 68 of the FCC rules.
Proper answer supervision is when:
1. This equipment returns answer supervision to the PSTN when DID calls are:
● Answered by the called station.
● Answered by the attendant.
● Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the CPE user.
● Routed to a dial prompt.
2. This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded to the PSTN. Per-
missible exception are:
● A call is unanswered.
● A busy tone is received.
● A reorder tone is received.
Hearing-Aid Compatibility
Telephones for emergency use and telephones installed in common areas such as lobbies,
hospital rooms, elevators, and hotel rooms must have handsets that are compatible with mag-
netically coupled hearing aids. Persons who are not in common areas must also be provided
with hearing-aid compatible handsets, if needed.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch01.fm
Important Notices
The Siemens Optiset E phones for the Siemens HiPath 4000 model 4300 and 4500 systems
are hearing-aid compatible and comply with the FCC Rules, Part 68, Section 68.316 and
68.317.
Programmed Dialer Features

When you program emergency numbers or make test calls to emergency numbers using Sie-
mens products with programmed dialer features, stay on the line and briefly explain to the dis-
patcher the reason for the call before hanging up. Perform these activities in off-peak hours,
such as early morning or late evening.
Connecting Off-premises Station Facilities

Customers who intend to connect off-premises station (OPS) facilities must inform the tele-
phone company of the OPS class for which the equipment is registered and the connection de-
sired.
Equal Access Requirements

Call aggregators such as hotels, hospitals, airports, and so on must provide the end-user equal
access codes to the carriers of the user’s choice. The current equal codes are 10XXX, 800, 888
or 950.
The Siemens HiPath 4000 model 4300 and 4500 systems are capable of providing users ac-
cess to interstate providers of operator services through the use of equal access codes. Mod-
ifications by aggregators to alter these capabilities is a violation of the Telephone Operator Con-
sumer Services Improvement Act of 1990 and Part 68 of the FCC Rules.
Electrical Safety Advisory

While the Siemens HiPath 4000 model 4300 and 4500 systems are fully compliant with FCC
rules and regulations, it is recommended that an alternating current (ac) surge arrestor of the
form and capability suitable for the model purchased be installed in the ac outlet to which the
Siemens HiPath 4000 system is connected. Consult with you distributor as to the surge protec-
tor requirements for your equipment.
1.5.2 Industry Canada Compliance

The following are notices required by Industry Canada Terminal Attachment Program Proce-
dure DC-01(E), Procedure for Declaration of Conformity and Registration of Terminal Equip-
ment, Section 6.4.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch01.fm
Important Notices
About This Book
1.5.2.1 Equipment Attachment Limitations

NOTICE: This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical
Specification. This is confirmed by the registration number. The abbreviation, IC, before the reg-
istration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity
indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. It does not imply that Indus-
try Canada approved the equipment.
1.5.2.2 Ringer Equivalence Number (REN)

NOTICE: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this terminal equipment is 0.4. The REN
assigned to each terminal equipment provides an indication of the maximum number of termi-
nals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may con-
sist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer
Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed five.
1.6 About This Book

This manual provides overview information and instructions for installing and testing the HiPath
4500, V1.0.
This manual is written for Siemens-trained personnel who Install and maintain the HiPath 4500.
1.6.1 How to Use This Book

This manual contains the following chapters:
Chapter 2, “Overview,”provides a description of the HiPath 4500. It also provides information
about its major functional units.
Chapter 3, “Preparing for Installation,”provides the procedures that must be performed before
installing the system.
Chapter 4, “Special Installation Notes,”provides special information for installation.
Chapter 5, “Installation Variants,”provides instructions for installing single, multicabinet, wall,
and free-standing systems.
Chapter 6, “Grounding the HiPath 4500,”provides the procedures for grounding the HiPath
4500.
Chapter 7, “Connecting the Power Supply,”provides the procedures for connecting the power
supply and calculating the battery cables.
Chapter 8, “Installing Cables,”provides the procedures for installing the cables associated with
the HiPath 4500.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch01.fm
Important Notices
About This Book
Chapter 9, “External Cabling Assemblies,”provides installation and cabling diagrams for the Hi-
Path 4500
Chapter 10, “Installing Peripheral Equipment,”provides instructions for installing the peripheral
equipment associated with the system.
Chapter 11, “Installing the HG 3800,”describes the procedures for installing the HG 3800 Fiber
link Extension (Flex Shelf) hardware components and interfaces.
Chapter 12, “Installing the IPDA,”describes the connection of the HiPath 4500 to the (IP Distrib-
uted Architecture) IPDA system.
Chapter 13, “Starting the System,”provides procedures for starting the HiPath 4500.
Chapter 14, “Verifying the System,”contains the test procedures used for verifying the operation
of the system.
Chapter 15, “Adding Cabinets to the System,” describes a procedure for expanding the system.
1.6.2 Prerequisite Knowledge

Persons installing or servicing the HiPath must have basic telephony and trunking knowledge
and experience.
1.6.3 Related Information

Related publications include the following manuals and guides:
● CorNet Reference Manual, Z281-073
● HiPath 4000 Manager V1.0 Installation and Service Manual, G281-0751
● HiPath 4000 V1.0 Conversion Manual, G281-0734
● HiPath 4000 V1.0 Customer Site Planning and Power and Grounding Manual, G281-0725
● HiPath 4300 V1.0 Installation Instructions (http://netinfo2.icn.siemens.de/e_doku/en/in-
dex.htm#hp40)
● HiPath 4000 V1.0 Service Manual (http://netinfo2.icn.siemens.de/e_doku/en/in-
dex.htm#hp40)
● Network Planning Guide, G281-0737
● HiPath ProCenter Standard and Advanced Installation Guide (http://netinfo2.icn.sie-
mens.de/e_doku/en/index.htm#hp40)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch01.fm
Important Notices
Documentation Feedback
1.6.4 Updates to this Manual, U.S.

Between CD-ROM deliveries, updates to this manual will be found in the Info and CE Notes on
the Siemens internal web.
1.7 Documentation Feedback

To report a problem with this document, call your next level of support:
● Siemens employees should call the National Support Center.
● Customers should call the Siemens Customer Support Center.
When you call, be sure to include the following information. This will help identify which docu-
ment you are having problems with.
● Title: HiPath 4500, V1.0, Installation Instructions
● Order Number: P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch01.fm
Important Notices
Documentation Feedback
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch02.fm
Overview
2 Overview
This chapter provides an overview of the major system functions and components of HiPath
4500.
2.1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2.1.1 AC-Powered, Non-Redundant HiPath 4500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.1.1 CCDAX Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1.1.2 Duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.1.3 Simplex Dual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.1.4 Simplex Mono . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.1.5 LTUW Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.1.2 AC-Powered, Redundant HiPath 4500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.1.3 DC-Powered, Redundant HiPath 4500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.2 Switching Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.2.1 Common Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.2.2 Switching Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.2.3 Service Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.3 Telephony Shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.4 External Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.4.1 Administrative Data Processor (ADP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.4.1.1 Commissioning the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.4.1.2 Direct AMO Dialog (DAD) Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.4.1.3 Remote Maintenance and Administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.4.1.4 Local Maintenance Terminal Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.1.5 Call Detail Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.1.6 Traffic Metering and Statistics Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.1.7 System Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.1.8 RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.1.9 HSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.5 Internal Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.5.1 Internal Server Common Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
This manual describes the installation of the HiPath 4500. HiPath 4500 is a part of the Hipath
4000 IP convergence platform that provides customers convergence applications and solutions
for multimedia communication from workstation to workstation.
The HiPath 4500 supports up to 15 direct connected Access Points and additional 83 Access
Points distributed over IP.
The HiPath 4500 system is designed as a free-standing system. The number of cabinets in-
stalled in the HiPath 4500 is based upon the customer configuration.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch02.fm
Overview
System Configuration
2.1 System Configuration

A HiPath 4500 stack consists of:
● 1 common control cabinet (CCDAX)
● 3 line trunk unit cabinets (LTUs) = (3x384 ports)
Stacks 2 through 4 consists of:
● 4 LTUs each (4x384 ports each)
The maximum power management unit configuration consists of up to 2 power boxes stacks.
The ac-powered redundant HiPath 4500 has a maximum of two power box (UACD) cabinets.
The dc-powered redundant HiPath 4500 has a maximum of two, 2-stack power box cabinets.
The HiPath 4500 is available in three configurations:
● Ac-powered, non-redundant
● Ac-powered, redundant
● Dc-powered, redundant only
2.1.1 AC-Powered, Non-Redundant HiPath 4500

The non-redundant ac-powered HiPath 4500 is similar in appearance to the HiPath 4300. It
uses the same ac-to-dc shelf power supplies (LPC80s) and dc-to-dc shelf power supplies
(PSUPs). You can have up a maximum of 4 HiPath 4500 cabinet stacks (see Figure 2-1 on
page 2-3).
The base cabinet of the ac-powered, non-redundant HiPath 4500 is the common control duplex
with administration extended (CCDAX) shelf. The remaining three shelves are telephony
shelves called line trunk unit wide (LTUW) shelves.
The ac-powered, non-redundant HiPath 4500 allows for a maximum of up to 16,000 ports.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch02.fm
Overview
Stack 1 Stack 2 Stack 3 Stack 4

LPC80
LPC80
LPC80
LPC80
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
L80XF L80XF L80XF L80XF
LPC80
LPC80
LPC80
LPC80
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
LPC80
LPC80
LPC80
LPC80
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
LPSUC
LPSUC
LPC80
LPC80
LPC80
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
CCDAX L80XF L80XF L80XF
40000060ger
Figure 2-1 HiPath 4500, Non-Redundant Power Configuration
2.1.1.1 CCDAX Shelf

The CCDAX shelf provide switching unit (SWU) and administration and data processor (ADP)
functions.
The SWU provides:
● A common control unit that starts and controls the call processing functions and features
of the system
● A switching network that controls the voice data highways that carry information through
the system
● A service unit that provides ringing, tones, conference call switching, dual-tone multi fre-
quency (DTMF) button signals, and public network dial tones for LTU boards
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch02.fm
Overview
The ADP:
● Places the system into service
● Provides access to system administration, maintenance, and configuration management
operations (Direct AMO Dialog, UBA, HSD or RDS)
● Provides a local maintenance terminal interface
● Provides various administrative reporting and security applications
The CCDAX shelf is available in three configurations:
● Duplex
● Simplex Dual
● Simplex Mono is not supported in the U.S.
2.1.1.2 Duplex
This configuration has two common controls (CC) and ADP. Each common control is powered
by a separate power supply. The ADP is powered by two power supplies to ensure continuous
operation during failure of one power supply.
Power ADP CC-A CC-B Power

supply supply
103
112
118
127
16
19
31
40
46
58
70
79
85
91
P S S H D D Q S M D Q S M P
S D D U P P D I T P D I T S
U 3 3 B C C C C S C C C S U
C H H C 5 5 L O C 5 L O C C
X X E G E G
* Optional
40000046ger
Figure 2-2 CCDAX Duplex Configuration
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch02.fm
Overview
2.1.1.3 Simplex Dual

This configuration is not equipped with a CC-B and an accompanying power supply.
Figure 2-3 shows a simplex dual configuration.
Power ADP CC-A

supply
103
112
118
127
16
19
31
40
46
58
70
79
85
91
P S S H D D Q S M
S D D U P P D I T
U 3 3 B C C C C S
C H H C 5 5 L O C
X X E G
* Optional
40000047ger
Figure 2-3 CCDAX Simplex Dual Configuration
2.1.1.4 Simplex Mono

In this configuration, CC-A also controls an optional HUBC in slot 52 and the storage drives on
each SD3HX holder. This configuration is not equipped with a CC-B and an accompanying
power supply.
Do not use slot 40 and 46.

>
Figure 2-4 on page 2-6 shows the CCDAX simplex mono configuration.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch02.fm
Overview
Power CC-ADP
supply
103
112
118
127
16
19
31
40
46
58
70
79
85
91
P S S H D Q S M
S D D U P D I T
U 3 3 B C C C S
C H H C 5 L O C
X X E G
* *
* Optional
40000048ger
Figure 2-4 CCDAX Simplex Mono Configuration
Figure 2-5 shows the connector and resistor pack locations of the HiPath 4500 CCDAX shelf.
16 19 31 40 46 52 58 70 79 85 91 103 112 118 127

ASW
LPSUC/PSUC
LPSUC/PSUC
BULK
LTU8
LTU8
BULK
LUT15 LTU14 LT713 LTU12 LTU11 LTU10 LTU9
LTU1
LUT15 LTU14 LTU13 LTU12 LTU11 LTU10 LTU9
LTU1
V24/2
SCSI
LTU3 LTU2
LTU3 LTU2
NG AR
V24/3
LTU4
LTU4
PFI
LPSUC/PSUC
LPSUC/PSUC
SD3HX**
SD3HX
LTU5
LT75
MTSCG
MTSCG
HUBC*
ALIN
SICOE
SICOE
LTU6
LTU6
V24/4
HUBC
QDCL
QDCL
DPC5
DPC5
DPC5
LUT7
LUT7
ADP CC-A CC-B

Slot for the HUBC in a Simplex M ono system
** Optional 40000044ger
Figure 2-5 CCDAX Shelf Slot Descriptions and Shelf Numbering
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch02.fm
Overview
2.1.1.5 LTUW Shelf

The line trunk unit wide (LTUW) shelf is the new version of the LTUE shelf. It functions as an
interface between the system and the external environment using champ connectors (see Fig-
ure 2-6 on page 2-7). The LTUW shelf is on a HiPath 4500, ac and dc, redundant system only.
The LTUW shelf provides slots for:
● Two dc-to-dc shelf power supplies (PSUPs)
● 16 Peripheral slots, up to 24 ports in narrowband
● A special slot for RG or peripheral signaling interface unit (SIU)
● One LTUCX board
Figure 2-6 shows the connectors on the LTUW backplane.
16 19 25 31 37 43 49 55 61 67 73 79 85 115 121 127

SIVAPAC (MDF)
SIVAPAC (MDF)
SIVAPAC (MDF)
SIVAPAC (MDF)
SIVAPAC (MDF)
SIVAPAC (MDF)
SIVAPAC (MDF)
SIVAPAC (MDF)
SIVAPAC (MDF)
SIVAPAC (MDF)
SIVAPAC (MDF)
SIVAPAC (MDF)
Champ (MDF)
Champ (MDF)
Champ (MDF)
Champ (MDF)
Champ (MDF)
Champ (MDF)
Champ (MDF)
Champ (MDF)
Champ (MDF)
Champ (MDF)
Champ (MDF)
Champ (MDF)
PSUP
PSUP
HTS
Bulk
Talk
PFI
RG/WG
RG/WG
LTUC.. board
PSUP
PSUP
BG 10
BG 15
BG 16
BG 1
BG 2
BG 3
BG 4
BG 5
BG 6
BG 7
BG 8
BG 9
WGM
RGM
Bulk
40000040ger
Figure 2-6 LTUW Backplane
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch02.fm
Overview
2.1.2 AC-Powered, Redundant HiPath 4500

The ac-powered, redundant HiPath 4500 configuration consist of up to four HiPath 4500 cabi-
net stack and up two unit alternating current distribution (UACD) power supply stack. (see Fig-
ure 2-7). A 2-cabinet HiPath 4500 cabinet stack receives input power from one UACD. A third
and fourth cabinet stack requires a second UACD The UACD receives input power from the
wall outlet.
A fully configured ac-powered, redundant HiPath 4500 can provide up to 16,000 ports, depend-
ing on the trunk and subscriber configuration.
The HiPath 4500 system uses SIPAC LTUW shelves. SIPAC and SIVAPAC shelves cannot be
mixed in the same system.
The ac-powered, redundant HiPath 4500 allows for a maximum of up to 16,000 ports.

PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
LTUW LTUW LTUW LTUW

UACD
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
LTUW LTUW LTUW LTUW

PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
LTUW LTUW LTUW LTUW
PSUC
PSUC
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
CCDAX LTUW LTUW LTUW
40000061ger
Figure 2-7 HiPath 4500, AC-Powered, Redundant CPU Configuration
Physical shelf numbering is consecutive from bottom-to-top in each cabinet. LTUP shelves are
also numbered by logical position. The LTUW logical shelf numbering is consecutive from bot-
tom-to-top and left-to-right in each system.
The cabinet stack layout is:
● Base cabinet: ADP and SWU on a common control duplex with administration extended
(CCDAX) shelf
● All other shelves: LTUW shelves
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch02.fm
Overview
2.1.3 DC-Powered, Redundant HiPath 4500

The dc-powered HiPath 4500 is available in a redundant configuration only. It consists of up to
four HiPath 4500 cabinet stack and up four unit direct current distribution (UDCD) power supply
stacks. (see Figure 2-8). Each dc-powered HiPath 4500 cabinet stack receives input power
from one UDCD.The UDCD receives input power from the power plant.
A fully configured dc-powered, redundant HiPath 4500 can provide up to 16,000 ports, depend-
ing on the trunk and subscriber configuration.
The HiPath 4500 system uses SIPAC LTUW shelves. SIPAC and SIVAPAC shelves cannot be
mixed in the same system.

PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
LTUW LTUW LTUW LTUW
UDCD
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
LTUW LTUW LTUW LTUW

PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
LTUW LTUW LTUW LTUW
PSUC
PSUC
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
PSUP
CCDAX LTUW LTUW LTUW
40000062ger
Figure 2-8 HiPath 4500, DC-Powered, Cabinet Layout
Physical shelf numbering is consecutive from bottom-to-top in each cabinet. LTUW shelves are
also numbered by logical position. The LTUW logical shelf numbering is consecutive from bot-
tom-to-top and left-to-right in each system.
The cabinet stack layout is as follows:
● Base cabinet: ADP and SWU on a CCDAX shelf
● All other shelves: LTUW shelves
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch02.fm
Overview
Switching Units
2.2 Switching Units

The switching unit (SWU) consists of a common control unit function, a switching network func-
tion, and a service unit function.
The SWU functions in a HiPath 4500 is performed by the DPC5 board. The DPC5 board pro-
vides the common-control unit, switching network, service unit functions, and Siemens LAN
connectivity through the SL2000 board. See Figure 2-9 on page 2-11.
This 2-board set also provides the ADP functions.

>
Figure 2-9 on page 2-11 shows the SWU functional diagram of the HiPath 4500.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch02.fm
Overview
Switching Units
MTSCG *
4 Voice data highway pairs Switching network

(part of MTSCG
Transmit Connection
:LTUCE table
Receive
Service Conference Connection

3 Voice data highway pairs
unit table
SIU
SICOE 1 Voice data highwaypair
MTS
extension 4 Super highways
interconnect
HDLC
MTSCG boards in
Service unit * a redundant
LTUCE Clock system
PSIO :LTUCE Up to 2 per system
DPC5 QDCL MTSCG
Multibus
Common control unit
Common control unit*
* Present in redundant systems only. 40000084ger
Figure 2-9 HiPath 4500 Switching Unit Functional Diagram
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch02.fm
Overview
Switching Units
2.2.1 Common Control Units

The common control unit performs and controls the call processing functions and features of
the system. These functions are distributed among the various hardware subcomponents in the
common control cabinet.
The HiPath 4500 SWU common control subcomponents are:
● Data processor controller 586 with LAN and 256 MB of dynamic memory (DPC5) board
● Clock generator function included on the memory time switch with clock generator
(MTSCG) board
● Enhanced quad data communication link (QDCL) board
2.2.2 Switching Networks

The switching network is a time-division switching matrix that controls the voice data highways
that carry the flow of information through the system. Voice data highways provide the commu-
nication channels between the switching network, the telephony shelves, and the service unit.
The memory time switch section of the MTSCG board performs the switching network function
in a HiPath 4500 system. In large systems the signaling interface and conference expanded
(SICOE) board provides additional memory time switching functionality.
The SWU DPC5 board and common control boards control the MTSCG board over the multi-
bus.
2.2.3 Service Units

The service unit function provides ringing, tones, conference call switching, dual-tone multifre-
quency (DTMF) button signals, and public network dial tones for telephony boards.
The service unit functions in a HiPath 4500 are distributed among the following:
● SICOE board
● Signaling interface unit peripheral extended (SIUX) board
● Ring generator
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch02.fm
Overview
Telephony Shelves
2.3 Telephony Shelves

Telephony shelves provide the interface between the system and the external environment in-
cluding the following:
● Telephone and maintenance terminal stations
● Trunks and network services (public and private)
● Devices connected to internal servers
Certain devices and applications can be, or must be, directly interfaced to the inter-
> nal or external server. This is accomplished using the DPC5, DSCX, HUBC, LAN
connection, SL200, or PSIO board. Refer to the Boards chapter in the HiPath 4000
V1.0 Service Manual for additional information about these boards.
There are two categories of telephony cabinet:
● Internal telephony cabinet—L80XF or LTUW cabinet
The functional components of the L80XF or LTUW cabinets consists of:
– Line trunk unit controller extended (LTUCE) board
– Subscriber-line module boards
– Trunk module boards
– LTU signal cables
● External telephony cabinet—HG3800/AP3300 Fiber Link Extension Shelf using the L80XF
cabinet.
2.4 External Servers

The HiPath 4000 applications operate in dedicated internal or external servers, allowing the
SWU to be dedicated to call processing services. Internal servers always reside in the CC80F
or CCDAX cabinets. External servers reside outside the cabinets. Refer to Table 2-1 on page
2-13 for an overview of the server types and the applicable applications.
Server Types
Applications Administrative Data External
Processor (ADP) Server
Administration and X
Data Processor
PhoneMail X
Table 2-1 Server Types and Applications Overview (Sheet 1 of 2)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch02.fm
Overview
External Servers
Server Types
Applications Administrative Data External
Processor (ADP) Server
Xpressions X
CallBridge X
HiPath 4000 Manager X
HiPath ProCenter Standard and Advanced X
Hicom Trading System X
Table 2-1 Server Types and Applications Overview (Sheet 2 of 2)
2.4.1 Administrative Data Processor (ADP)

The ADP is the primary internal server and is a mandatory component of all systems. Its main
function is administration and maintenance of the system.
The standard functions of the ADP are:
● Commissioning the system
● Direct AMO dialog (DAD) access for configuration administration
● Remote maintenance administration (RMA)
● Local maintenance terminal interface
● Call detail recording (CDR)
● Traffic metering and statistics
2.4.1.1 Commissioning the System

The ADP is responsible for commissioning (placing into service) the system.
The commissioning sequence occurs after powering on a system and after a software- or hard-
ware-initiated system restart (reload or hard restart only).
The ADP also reloads flashware and loadware on a subsystem level (ADP, SWU, and ACD sec-
ondary server) and an individual module level (after deactivation and activation of boards).
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch02.fm
Overview
External Servers
The commissioning sequence is as follows:

● Startup of ADP:
– Loading ADP common control unit flashware
– Loading ADP common control unit software
– Starting basic operation of ADP common control unit
– Initializing the ADP interface ports
– Loading the ADP interface ports
– Starting the ADP interface ports
● Startup of switching unit:
– Loading SWU flashware
– Loading SWU software
– Starting basic operation of the SWU
– Copying Unixware command file for database
– Generating the database
– Loading the loadware on telephony boards
– Starting telephony boards
– Starting the call processing operation
2.4.1.2 Direct AMO Dialog (DAD) Access

The HiPath 4000 Manager provides direct command line access for administration and trouble-
shooting configuration and system problems.
2.4.1.3 Remote Maintenance and Administration

The Unixware-based RMA application provides major and minor alarm reporting.
RMA requires a CCA II (asynchronous) modem to support the following:
● To report major system outages to the RMA catcher and for remote terminal access to the
system
● To report major and minor alarms to the RMA catcher
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch02.fm
Overview
Internal Servers
2.4.1.4 Local Maintenance Terminal Interface

This interface provides for the physical connection of a maintenance terminal to the ADP and
access to Unixware applications.
2.4.1.5 Call Detail Recording

CDR provides traffic statistics for monitoring system activity and evaluating system perfor-
mance. CDR statistics can also be used by the traffic metering and statistics application.
2.4.1.6 Traffic Metering and Statistics Application

This program is a Unixware-based application that analyzes system performance and gener-
ates tabular data for evaluating and optimizing system resources.
2.4.1.7 System Security

Application software in the ADP provides for system security. The system administrator uses
the software to assign user passwords and control the access level of those passwords. This
prevents unauthorized access to the system and to critical system files, databases, and admin-
istration or maintenance facilities.
2.4.1.8 RDS
Realtime Diagnostics System (RDS) formerly trunk diagnostics system (TDS) is a diagnostic
tool that provides telephony fault localization for station and data lines and limited trunk fault
reporting capabilities for trunk facility problems. It provides tools and features that allow you to
solve line and trunk problems more efficiently
2.4.1.9 HSD
The hardware and symptom diagnosis (HSD) tool is a browser-based application that resides
on the Primergy server. HSD functionality consists of menu choices within the HiPath 4000
Manager client application. HSD can be used either remotely or locally. It is designed to im-
prove usability, reduce service time, reduce cost, and enhance serviceability.
2.5 Internal Servers

Internal servers are optionally available in all HiPath 4000 systems. The internal servers are
configured in the DSCX or DPC5 board.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch02.fm
Overview
Internal Servers
2.5.1 Internal Server Common Control Unit

The internal server common control unit administers and controls the functions and features of
the application software running on the internal server. It consists of the following subcompo-
nents:
– DPC5 board
– HUBC board
– PSIO board (optional)
The peripheral serial input/output (PSIO) board expands the I/O capabilities of the DPC5 or
DSCX boards by providing up to six additional I/O ports. This board is only available in conver-
sions.
Each of the common control unit boards interface with one another over the multibus.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch02.fm
Overview
Internal Servers
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch03.fm
Preparing for Installation
Installation Procedures Matrix
3 Preparing for Installation

The following information should be noted when building cabinets with the main distribution
frame.
3.1 Installation Procedures Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.2 Installation Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3 Conducting the Site Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.4 Receiving the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.5 Inspecting for Shipping Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.6 Removing the System from its Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.7 Removing a System with a Roller Base from the Pallet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.8 Positioning the Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.9 Leveling the Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.10 Removing the Front Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.11 Removing the Back Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.12 Important Labels on the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.13 Inventorying the System Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.14 Inventorying the System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.15 Inventorying the Installation Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.16 Performing Pre-Installation Trunk Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.17 Installing Seismic Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.18 Stacking HiPath 4000 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.19 Installing the Cable Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.1 Installation Procedures Matrix

This section provides an installation matrix to install the HiPath 4500. Check each step as you
finish performing each task.
Installation Steps Refer to: ✔
1. Prepare for installation.

a) Installation materials Section 3.2 on page 3-5
b) Verify the site. Section 3.3 on page 3-6
c) Receive the system. Section 3.4 on page 3-6
d) Inspect for shipping damages. Section 3.5 on page 3-7
e) Remove the system from its packaging Section 3.6 on page 3-7
f) Remove the system from the pallet. Section 3.7 on page 3-7
Table 3-1 Installation Matrix (Sheet 1 of 4)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch03.fm
g) Position the cabinets. Section 3.8 on page 3-9

h) Level the cabinets Section 3.9 on page 3-10
i) Remove the front covers Section 3.10 on page 3-11
j) Remove the back covers Section 3.11 on page 3-12
k) Check and read the labels in the cabi- Section 3.12 on page 3-15
nets.
l) Inventory the system hardware. Section 3.13 on page 3-17
m) Inventory the system software. Section 3.14 on page 3-17
n) Inventory the installation kit. Section 3.15 on page 3-17
o) Perform pre-installation trunk proce- Section 3.16 on page 3-17
dures.
p) Install seismic anchors, if applicable. Section 3.17 on page 3-18
q) Install the cable channels. Section 3.19 on page 3-19
2. Ground the HiPath 4500
a) Ground the MDF, I.M. Section 6.1 on page 6-1
b) Connect and ground the cabinets Section 6.2 on page 6-2
c) Ground the system. Section 6.3 on page 6-5
Section 6.4 on page 6-6
3. Connect the power supply
a) Connect to the mains. Section 7.1 on page 7-2
b) Install a three-phase connection. Section 7.2 on page 7-5
c) Install a single-phase connection. Section 7.3 on page 7-6
d) Install a three-phase or single-phase Section 7.5 on page 7-8
connection with mid-point grounding.
e) Connect the battery to the power box Section 7.11.1 on page 7-17
(I.M.)
f) Connect the MDF (I.M.). Section 7.1.2 on page 7-4
Section 7.14.1 on page 7-28
g) Connect the power box to the system. Section 7.14 on page 7-27 x
4. Install the signal cables. Section 8.1 on page 8-1
5. Connect to the LAN. Section 8.5 on page 8-13
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch03.fm
6. Install the service alarm cable and trunk by- Section 8.6 on page 8-13
pass.
7. Install the external cables. Chapter 9, “External Cabling Assem-
blies”
8. Install the peripheral equipment, if applica- Chapter 10, “Installing Peripheral x
ble. Equipment”
9. Install the HG 3800, if applicable Chapter 11, “Installing the HG 3800”
10. Install the IPDA, if applicable. Chapter 12, “Installing the IPDA”
11. Start the system.
a) Perform pre-power on checks. Section 13.2 on page 13-2
b) Apply power to the HiPath 4500. Section 13.3 on page 13-3
c) Install PROCOMM PLUS, if applicable. Section 13.10 on page 13-9
d) Enable the clock batteries. Section 13.11 on page 13-10
e) Set the date and time. Section 13.12 on page 13-10
f) Install the database. Section 13.13 on page 13-11
g) Start the HiPath 4500. Section 13.14 on page 13-14
h) Connect to the maintenance terminal. Section 13.15 on page 13-15
i) Run the dongle code word. Section 13.16 on page 13-17
j) Replace the covers. Section 13.17 on page 13-18
12. Verify the System.
a) Check the boards. Section 14.2 on page 14-2
b) Check the cables. Section 14.3 on page 14-2
c) Verify the AC4. Section 14.4 on page 14-3
d) Test the maintenance terminal for the Section 14.5 on page 14-5
blind.
e) Check and test the features. Section 14.6 on page 14-6
f) Test the restart and failure transfer Section 14.7 on page 14-6
function.
g) Backup the customer data. Section 14.8 on page 14-7
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch03.fm
h) Set and activate the HTS function. Section 14.9 on page 14-7
i) Verify the ring generator. Section 14.10 on page 14-8
j) Verify the station-to-MDF connections. Section 14.11 on page 14-8
k) Verify transmission facilities. Section 14.12 on page 14-8
l) Verify the MO disk. Section 14.13 on page 14-18 x
m) Verify the hard disk. Section 14.14 on page 14-18 x
n) Verify the operation of system features Section 14.15 on page 14-19 x
and servers.
o) Verify the system bypass Section 14.16 on page 14-25 x
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch03.fm
Installation Materials
3.2 Installation Materials

The installation materials used to build your system are provided in the system assignment list.
This list is produced on a customer-specific basis and is supplied with the system. Table 3-2
lists the standard tools that are used in installing the HiPath 4500.
Tools Size
Allen key wrenches Complete set
Cable stripper
Channel lock pliers, large
Communication technician’s pliers
Compass saw
Cross-head screwdriver (Phillips screwdriver in the U.S.)
Diagonal cutting pliers
Drill
Gloves
Hammer 400 g (14 oz)
Insertion tool (board removal and replacement tool in the U.S.)
Level
Meter stick (yardstick in the U.S.)
Module key (board removal and replacement tool in the U.S.)
Ring or flat spanners (open-ended socket wrench in the U.S.) 8 mm to 19 mm (.3 to .7 in)
Socket spanner set (socket wrench in the U.S.) 10 mm to 19 mm (.4 in to .7
in)
Screwdrivers 2 mm to 8 mm
In the U.S., Phillips (no. 2
and no. 3) and flat-blade
(3/16 inch by 4 inch)
Seismic anchor kit (if applicable)
Side cutter
Soldering iron
Spirit level (level in the U.S.)
Stripping knife
Telephone pliers (long-nose pliers)
Table 3-2 Standard Installation Tools (Sheet 1 of 2)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch03.fm
Conducting the Site Verification
Tools Size
Terminal crimping pliers (crimpers in the U.S.) Up to 50 mm (2 in)
Torx screwdrivers Complete set
Wrench, hex key, 6 mm
Wrench, hex socket, 7/32 inch
Wrist band and conductive pad (ESD equipment in the U.S.)
Table 3-2 Standard Installation Tools (Sheet 2 of 2)
Check your tools regularly and only use serviceable tools.

>
The following tools are required for pre-installation tasks:
● Scissors
● Screwdriver, flat-blade 3/16 inch by 4 inches
● Screwdriver, Phillips no. 3
● Wrench, 8-inch adjustable
● Wrench, 10-mm hex socket
● Wrench, 9/16-inch hex socket
3.3 Conducting the Site Verification

Arrange for a qualified electrical contractor to conduct a walk-through with you and check the
site for customer compliance to site engineering conditions, including power and grounding,
cabinet and peripheral space allocations and safety requirements. In the U.S., customer site
requirements are specified in the following documents:
● Site map
● Siemens HiPath 4000 V1.0, Customer Site Planning Guide and Power and Grounding
Guide and Specifications, G281-0725.
3.4 Receiving the System

The system is delivered to the site with boards, power supplies, MO disk drive unit, and hard
disks installed. The packing list, bill of materials, and hardware map are also shipped with the
system.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch03.fm
Inspecting for Shipping Damage
3.5 Inspecting for Shipping Damage

Before accepting the delivery of any equipment:
1. List any obvious external damage on the shipping documents, then ask the delivery per-
sonnel to sign the documents.
2. Handle any damage according to local procedures.
3.6 Removing the System from its Packaging
Warning
7 Never attempt to lift heavy objects without help.
To remove the system from its packaging:

1. Cut and dispose the pallet strapping.
2. Remove and dispose of packing materials.
3. Examine the system for damages during transportation.
4. Record and report any damages according to local procedures or the appropriate service
center.
Danger
7 Immediately replace the power supply cable if it shows any signs of damage, as well
as any damaged safety facilities (covers, stickers, and grounding wires).
3.7 Removing a System with a Roller Base from the Pallet
Place the pallet as close to the equipment room as possible before removing the
> cabinet.
To remove a system with a roller base from the pallet (see Figure 3-1 on page 3-8):
1. At the base of the cabinet, remove the screws on the left and right-hand side of the pallet.
2. Tilt the system up on one side (1) and slide out the crosspiece (2). Repeat this procedure
on the other side.
3. Push the two boards to the middle (3) and slide them out (4).
4. Place the system in the designated installation location.
5. Secure the casters (5) by pressing the caster locks downwards.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch03.fm
Removing a System with a Roller Base from the Pallet
Warning
7 Secure all four casters (only for a 3 or 4-cabinet system) to prevent the system from
rolling away. Lock the rollers once the system is installed or moved.
5
4 3
Figure 3-1 Removing the Pallet (System with a Roller Base)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch03.fm
Positioning the Cabinets
3.8 Positioning the Cabinets

In multicabinet systems, position cabinet 1 in the equipment room first, then position the addi-
tional cabinets.
The physical characteristics of the HiPath 4500 and 4500 are similar.
To position the cabinet in the equipment room:
1. Unlock the casters by lifting the caster locks upwards on the cabinet leveling assembly
(see Figure 3-2).
2. Roll the cabinet into the location specified by the equipment room floor plan.
3. Lock the casters by pushing the lock on the cabinet leveling assembly downwards.
To unlock
To lock
Figure 3-2 Caster Locks
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch03.fm
Leveling the Cabinets
3.9 Leveling the Cabinets

To level the cabinets (see Figure 3-3):
1. Use a wrench to loosen the lock nut on the caster (1).
2. Use the Allen wrench to adjust the height of the caster (2).
3. Once the height is adjusted, tighten the lock nuts.
1 2
Figure 3-3 Leveling the Casters
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch03.fm
Removing the Front Covers
3.10 Removing the Front Covers

To remove the front covers in a HiPath 4000:
1. Find the two slots under the front cover (see arrows under the front cover on Figure 3-4).).
2. Insert a 5/8-in. (or smaller) flat-blade screwdriver into each of the two slots and push hard
(until you hear a click) to release the cover.
Slot Slot
Figure 3-4 Removing Front Covers (1 of 2)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch03.fm
Removing the Back Covers
3. Pull the bottom part of the front cover away from the cabinet and lift upwards (see Figure
3-5).
4. Place the cover in a safe location.
Figure 3-5 Removing the Covers (2 of 2)
3.11 Removing the Back Covers

To remove the back covers:
1. At the top of the cabinet, remove the screw on the top cover with a flat-blade screwdriver
(see Figure 3-6 on page 3-13 and Figure 3-7 on page 3-14).
2. Using two hands, lift the cover upwards to disengage it from the cabinet frame mounting
bracket.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch03.fm
Screw
Cover latches
Cabinet frame
mounting bracket
Figure 3-6 Removing the Back Cover
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch03.fm
2 3
1
Figure 3-7 Removing the Back Cover of a Base Cabinet
3. If the system contains multiple cabinets, remove the remaining covers from the lower cab-
inets by following step 2 (see Figure 3-8).
4. Put the covers in a safe location.
Figure 3-8 Removing the Back Cover of the Lower Cabinet
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch03.fm
Important Labels on the System
3.12 Important Labels on the System

Upon removing the covers, pay attention to the labels that are on the system (see Figure 3-9,
Figure 3-10 on page 3-15, and Figure 3-11 on page 3-16).
MULTIPLE SOURCES OF POWER
! Refer to Service Manual

before removing covers.
Figure 3-9 Cover Label
WARNING
HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT
Earth Connection Required
Before Connecting Supply
! AVERTISSEMENT
COURANT DE FUITE ELEVE
Raccordement a la terre
indispensable avant
le raccordement au reseau
Figure 3-10 High Leakage Current Label
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch03.fm
Important Labels on the System
4500. AC 4500. DC
Front Back Front Back
HiPath 4000 series Compliance High leakage current

Compliance labels V32905-B22-X107, 1 V32905-B23-X204,
4500 AC nonredundant
per stack
V32905-B22-X106, 1
per stack
MSOP
UACD Compliance V32905-B23-X201 UDCD
V32905-B22-X111 with second stack
MSOP
V32905-B23-X201 Compliance
with second cabinet V32905-B22-X108
40000120ger2
Figure 3-11 Locations of the Labels on the System
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch03.fm
Inventorying the System Hardware
3.13 Inventorying the System Hardware

To verify each cabinet hardware
1. Compare the hardware in the cabinet against the packing slip, bill of materials, and hard-
ware map.
2. Handle any discrepancies according to local procedures and record them on the Installa-
tion Report form.
3.14 Inventorying the System Software

The system hard disk contains the latest correction version (KV) load or system call processing
software along with the RMX and Unixware operating system.
A backup software (customer database) is supplied in the MO drive.
3.15 Inventorying the Installation Kit
An installation kit is shipped with each system.

>
To inventory the installation kit, refer to the packing list that accompanies the system.
3.16 Performing Pre-Installation Trunk Procedures

To prepare for trunk installation:
1. Obtain the following trunk information from the facility provider:
● Trunk installation schedule of the Facility provider
● Grade of service to be delivered
● Trunk circuit identification—this identifies the trunk circuit to the telephone company
● RJ21X pin assignments
● Maintenance limits
The facility provider has maintenance limits that determine how much the circuit
> loss can vary before the facility provider responds to correct it.
2. Confirm with the facility provider coordinator that all trunk testing has been scheduled with
the telephone company or vendor.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch03.fm
Installing Seismic Anchors
3.17 Installing Seismic Anchors

Seismic anchors may or may not be required by your local or state code or agency. If seismic
anchors are required for your installation, contact the site engineer before you perform the pro-
cedure. Follow the installation instructions that are included in the seismic anchor installation
kit.
3.18 Stacking HiPath 4000 Cabinets

The factory ships the HiPath 4500 cabinets already stacked according to configuration of the
system that has been ordered (see Figure 3-12 on page 3-18 for an example).
To add cabinets to the system, refer to Section 15, “Adding Cabinets to the System”.
Figure 3-12 HiPath 4000 Stacked Cabinets (Front View)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch03.fm
Installing the Cable Channels
3.19 Installing the Cable Channels

To install the cable channels:
1. At the back of the base cabinet, place the cable channel against the cabinet as shown in
Figure 3-13.
2. Secure the cable channels with screws.
Screw
Screw location
location
Cable
channels
Screw
location
Figure 3-13 Cable Channels
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch03.fm
Installing the Cable Channels
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch04.fm
Special Installation Notes
Removing 24-Port Boards
4 Special Installation Notes

This chapter provides special instructions about installing the HiPath 4500.
4.1 Removing 24-Port Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1.1 SIVAPAC-to-SIPAC Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.1 SIVAPAC-to-SIPAC Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.2 Installing the Adapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2 Network Strips, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.1 Installing 16DA Splitting Strips on a New Main Distribution Frame, I.M.. . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.2 Installing 24DA Splitting Strips on an Old Main Distribution Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.1 Removing 24-Port Boards

Always follow the electrostatic discharge (ESD) prevention procedure when you remove and
replace boards. Failure to follow the ESD prevention procedure can result in permanent or in-
termittent board failures. Refer to the HiPath 4000 V1.0 Service Manual for step-by-step ESD
prevention procedures.
Attention: Static Sensitive Devices

4 Observe all precautions for electrostatic discharge.
Caution
7 To protect the static sensitive components:
● Always put on the ESD wrist strap on your bare wrist before you touch any of
the boards or assemblies.
● Only transport the boards in ESD protective packaging.
● Always place and work with the boards on a grounded conductive pad.
DANGER
1 To avoid electrical shock, never wear the ESD wrist strap while working on the power
system or at the back of the cabinet.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch04.fm
To remove or install boards:

1. Only use the supplied board removal and replacement tool (see Figure 4-1).
2. Refer to the markings on the board removal and replacement tool for instructions on how
to use it.
Removing the Board Installing the Board
Figure 4-1 Removing and Installing the Board
4.1.1 SIVAPAC-to-SIPAC Adapter

A SIVAPAC-to-SIPAC board adapter (Adapter 1) is used to adapt 16-port boards with SIVAPAC
connectors to shelves with SIPAC connectors.
The installed Adapter 1 makes the 16-port boards protrude from the shelf, a little farther than
the 24-port boards. To lock the 16-port boards into position, special latches are provided above
(black) and below (gray) the shelf. When the adapters are installed, only the gray latches lock
into place.
The Adapter 1 has three pieces: one power-up module and two adapter modules
> (see Figure 4-3 on page 4-4).
Once installed, never remove the board adapters.
You must install the 16-port adapters manually, as they cannot be installed using the
board removal and replacement tool. You cannot use this tool to seat boards with
gray latches into place. To remove the boards, follow the instructions in Section 4.1,
“Removing 24-Port Boards”.
To install the board adapter (see Figure 4-2 on page 4-3 and Figure 4-3 on page 4-4):
1. Release the gray latch in front of the board.
2. Remove the board from the shelf.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch04.fm
3. Face the backplane connector of the board towards you.

4. On the adapter module (labeled 1 and 2), slightly pull the catch hooks apart.
5. Position the adapter module over the backplane connector of the board.
6. Ensure that the outer edge of each adapter module corresponds with each outer edge of
the board.
7. Ensure that the outermost row of pins of each adapter module is aligned with the outermost
row of the board connector, then insert the module into the connector.
8. Snap on the catch hooks.
9. Install the other module onto the board connect.
If the clearance between the board connector and the hot plug connector on the
> board is not sufficient for the module catch hook, loosen the two hot plug con-
nector screws on the back of the board and adjust location to allow the catch
hook to fit between the hot plug and the board connector.
10. Insert the power-up module (3) into the hot plug connector of the board.
1 3 2
Figure 4-2 Installing the SIVAPAC-to-SIPAC Adapter 1 (1 of 2)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch04.fm
Adapter modules
711
RK/9 6
195-B
28-A
C392
Power-up module
ter 1
Adap s
en
Siem
Catch hook
711
RK/9 6
195-B
28-A
C392
ter 1
Adap s
en
Siem
Catch hook
Component
side
LEDs
40000038ger
Figure 4-3 Installing the SIVAPAC-to-SIPAC Board Adapter 1 (2 of 2)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch04.fm
4.1.2 Installing the Adapter 2

An adapter 2 is a SIPAC-to-SIVAPAC board adapter. Use an Adapter 2 to adapt boards with
SIPAC connectors to shelves with SIVAPAC connectors.
The board Adapter 2 comes in three pieces: one power-up module and two adapter
> modules (see Figure 4-3 on page 4-6).
Once installed, never remove the board adapters.
To install the board adapter 2 (see Figure 4-3 on page 4-6).
1. Face the backplane connector of the board towards you.
2. Insert the power-up module into the middle section of the backplane connector as shown
in Figure 4-3 on page 4-6.
3. On the adapter module, slightly pull the catch hooks apart.
4. Position the adapter module over the backplane connector of the board. Ensure that the
outer edge of each adapter module corresponds with each outer edge of the board as
shown in Figure 4-3 on page 4-6.
5. Ensure that each adapter module’s outermost row of pins is aligned with the outermost row
of the board connector, then insert the module into the connector.
6. Snap on the catch hooks.
7. If the catch hooks do not correctly lock, the adapter module is incorrectly positioned. Re-
verse the position of the module and repeat the step.
8. Perform steps 3 through 7 for the other adapter module.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch04.fm
Network Strips, I.M.
Adapter modules
512
RK/9 8
195-B
C392
28-A
Power-up module
ter 2
Adap s
To SIVAPAC
Siem
en
backplane
512
RK/9 8
195-B
28-A
C392
ter 2
Adap s
en
Siem
Catch hook
Catch hook
Component
side
LEDs
40000039ger
Figure 4-4 Installing the SIPAC-to-SIVAPAC Board Adapter 2
4.2 Network Strips, I.M.

In HiPath 4000, 24DA network strips, also known as splitting strips are available for the main
distribution frame (MDF) in addition to the existing 16DA splitting strips.
There is a new design of the main distribution frame.

>
This section describes the installation 16DA splitting strips on the new MDF and how to install
the new 24DA splitting strips on the existing main distribution frame (for example, during the
conversion or upgrade of an older system).
4.2.1 Installing 16DA Splitting Strips on a New Main Distribution

Frame, I.M.
To install a 16DA splitting strip on a new main distribution frame (see Figure 4-5):
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002
montbuch04.fm
1. Fasten a screw on the left-hand side of the adapter strap (1) to the right-hand side of the
splitting strip.
2. Fasten a screw on the left-hand side of the splitting strip (2) to the main distribution frame
(MDF).
3. Fasten a screw on the right-hand side of the adapter strap (3) to the MDF.
Splitting Strip
MDF MDF
Adapter Strap
2 1 3
Figure 4-5 16DA Splitting Strips on a New Main Distribution Frame, Front View
4.2.2 Installing 24DA Splitting Strips on an Old Main Distribution Frame

To install a 24DA splitting strip to an old main distribution frame:
1. Fasten a screw on the applicable adapter strap to the left-hand side of the splitting strip,
as shown in Figure 4-6 on page 4-8.
2. Fasten a screw on the second adapter strap to the right-hand side of the splitting strip, as
3. Fasten a screw on the left-hand side of the pre-assembled splitting strip to the MDF (1) as
4. Fasten a screw on the right-hand adapter strap of the pre-assembled splitting strip to the
MDF (2).
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch04.fm
Figure 4-6 24DA Splitting Strips Adapter Strap, Left
Figure 4-7 24DA Splitting Strip Adapter Strap, Right
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch04.fm
1
2
Figure 4-8 24DA Splitting Strip on an Old Main Distribution Frame
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch04.fm
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch05.fm
Installation Variants
5 Installation Variants
This chapter provides installation diagrams for the HiPath 4500. Specific installation diagrams
for the HG 3800 and IPDA are located in the HG 3800 and IPDA chapters. Unless otherwise
noted, all diagrams apply to both U.S. and I.M. installations.
5.1 Multiple Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

5.2 AC-to-DC Power Box Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.3 DC-to-DC Power Box Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.4 Free-Standing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.5 Cabling Diagram, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.6 Cabinet Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.6.1 CCDAX Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.6.1.1 Duplex Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.6.1.2 Simplex Dual Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.6.1.3 Simplex Mono Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.6.2 Unit Peripheral Redundant Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.6.3 Unit Peripheral Non-Redundant Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.6.4 Redundant Power Box Stacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.7 MDFHX 6 Mounting Location, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.8 MDFHX 8 Mounting Location, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch05.fm
Multiple Cabinet Installation
5.1 Multiple Cabinet Installation
The dimensions shown in the following illustration are minimum dimensions in milli-
> meters (mm).
Figure 5-1 shows a diagram of a multiple cabinet installation.
500
25 1840
SIEMENS
HiPath 4000
425 150 350
1415
400
1015
950
SIEMENS
400
HiPath 4000
615
65
530
525 335
15 125
25 90
65
720 515
773 650
Figure 5-1 Multiple Cabinet Installation
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch05.fm
AC-to-DC Power Box Installation
5.2 AC-to-DC Power Box Installation
The ac-powered power box is called a unit alternating current distribution (UACD)
> power supply.
meters (mm).
Figure 5-2 shows the dimensions of the UACD.
1310
610
700
90
550
720
650
Figure 5-2 UACD
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch05.fm
DC-to-DC Power Box Installation
5.3 DC-to-DC Power Box Installation
The dc-powered power box is called a unit direct current distribution (UDCD) power
> supply.
meters (mm).
Figure 5-3 shows the dimensions of a 2-stack UDCD.
1535
Z Z Z
O Y Y Y I
T T T C UDCD(b)
D R R R
P B 610
O O O P
N N N
Z
925
Z Z
O Y Y Y I
D T T T C
P R R R B
O O O UDCD(a)
P
N N N
315
BUA 225 Base Unit
90
Front View 550
720 650
Figure 5-3 UDCD
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch05.fm
Free-Standing Installation
5.4 Free-Standing Installation

Figure 5-4 shows a diagram of a free-standing installation. This diagram applies to the U.S. with
the exception of the MDF cabinets
The maximum ac-powered system configuration consists of four 4-stack cabinets and one 2-
stack UACD.
The maximum dc-powered system configuration consists of four 4-stack cabinets and two 2-
stack UACDs.
2700 2700
MDFHX6 175 MDFHX6
1000
Cable duct = Basic configuration
Ref.point
= Reference for
max. 2 Stack 1 Stack 2 Stack 3 Stack 4 800 system cable
SRR 01
UACD 4 U... 4 UP... 4 UP.... 4 UP...
SRR = Row of cabinets
SR 105 101 102 103 104 SR = Cabinet
1000
773 Expansion
Front
Location of:
800
ST, printer, server, etc.
1500 ~3870 250
Figure 5-4 HiPath 4500 Free-Standing Installation
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch05.fm
Cabling Diagram, I.M.
5.5 Cabling Diagram, I.M.
16
-
9
8
-
1
UP
16 UPR
- 16
9 -
9
-8
1 -8
1
UP
UP
UPR
16 UPR
- 16
9 -
9
8
- 8
1 -
1
UP
UP
UPR
16 UPR
- 16
9 -
9
8
-
1 -8
1
MDFHX6 UP
UP
(1) UPR
UPR
MDFHX6
(6) UCD Stack
(CCDAX) 2, 3, 4
Stack
1
Figure 5-5 HiPath 4500 Cable Routing
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch05.fm
Cabinet Configuration
5.6 Cabinet Configuration

This section shows board and power supply locations on the common control and expansion
shelves.
5.6.1 CCDAX Cabinet
5.6.1.1 Duplex Cabinet
Power Power
ADP CC-A CC-B
Supply Supply
103
112
118
127
16
19
31
40
46
58
70
79
85
91
#
LPSUC/PSUC
LPSUC/PSUC
MTSCG
MTSCG
SD3HX
SD3HX
SICOE
SICOE
HUBC
QDCL
QDCL
DPC5
DPC5
DPC5
Figure 5-6 CCDAX Duplex Cabinet
5.6.1.2 Simplex Dual Cabinet
Power
Supply ADP CC-A
127
118
112
103
70
79
31
91
40
46
58
85
16
19
#
LPSUC/PSUC
MTSCG
SD3HX
SD3HX
SICOE
HUBC
QDCL
DPC5
DPC5
Figure 5-7 CCDAX Simplex Dual Cabinet
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch05.fm
5.6.1.3 Simplex Mono Cabinet
Power CC-ADP
Supply
112
118
127
103
70
79
91
52
58
40
85
31
19
16
# #
LPSUC/PSUC
# = optional
MTSCG
SD3HX
SD3HX
SICOE
HUBC
QDCL
DPC5
Figure 5-8 CCDAX Simplex Mono Cabinet
5.6.2 Unit Peripheral Redundant Cabinet
The unit peripheral redundant (UPR) cabinet is otherwise known as the LTUW
> cabinet.
LTUW
#
PSUP
Peripheral modules Peripheral modules

PSUP
NCUI
Figure 5-9 UPR Cabinet
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch05.fm
5.6.3 Unit Peripheral Non-Redundant Cabinet
The unit peripheral non-redundant (UP) cabinet is otherwise known as the L80XF
> cabinet.
L80XF
LPC80
Peripheral modules Peripheral modules
PSUP
NCUI
Figure 5-10 UP Cabinet
5.6.4 Redundant Power Box Stacks
CABPSD 2
PDPX LPC 1 LPC 2 LPC 3 ACDPX
Stack 3/4
CABPSD 1
PDPX LPC 1 LPC 2 LPC 3 ACDPX
Stack 1/2
Figure 5-11 Redundant Power Box Stacks
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch05.fm
MDFHX 6 Mounting Location, I.M.
5.7 MDFHX 6 Mounting Location, I.M.
33 +1
App. Drill template supplied
4 3)
MDFHX 6 MDFHX 6
1100 1) 1305 2)
420 1)
450 2)
20 4) 1) Mounting dimensions
2) Clipping dimensions
3) Distance between MDF HX units
4) Minimum distance from floor
Figure 5-12 Mounting the MDFHX 6 Wall Fixture
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch05.fm
5.8 MDFHX 8 Mounting Location, I.M.
33 +1
App.
Drill template supplied
4 3)
MDFHX 8 MDFHX 8
530 1) 745 2)
420 1)
450 2)
20 4) 1) Mounting dimensions
2) Clipping dimensions
3) Distance between MDFHX units
4) Minimum distance from floor
Figure 5-13 Mounting the MDFHX 8 Wall Fixture
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch05.fm
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch06.fm
Grounding the HiPath 4500
Grounding the MDF, I.M.
6 Grounding the HiPath 4500

This section describes instructions for grounding the main distribution frame (MDF) and the
system.
6.1 Grounding the MDF, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.2 Connecting and Grounding the Cabinets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.1 Grounding the Base Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2.2 Installing the Ground Straps Between Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3 Grounding the System, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.4 Grounding the System, U.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.5 System Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.1 Grounding the MDF, I.M.
Caution
7 In undefined main distribution frames (external distributors), you must connect the
ground of the base cabinet (CCDAX) and the main distribution frame directly to the
ground busbar. In this instance, you must not connect a ground connection directly
from the main distribution frame to the base cabinet.
To ground the MDF:
1. Connect the ground connector (green/yellow) from the ground busbar (building ground) to
terminal connection (1) of the first main distribution frame (see Figure 6-1).
Ground connect. pt.1 in MDF
Ground con-
ductor MDF to
base cabinet
2
1
Ground conductor from
ground busbar to MDF
Figure 6-1 Ground Connection of the HiPath 4500 MDF
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch06.fm
Connecting and Grounding the Cabinets
2. If several main distribution frames are installed, connect a second ground conductor to the
terminal connection (2) of the first main distribution frame (see Figure 6-1) and connect this
line to terminal connection point 2 of the second main distribution frame.
Repeat this procedure, if necessary, from main distribution frame 2 to 3 and 4.
6.2 Connecting and Grounding the Cabinets

Figure 6-2 shows the placement of the connecting plate assemblies (straps) for grounding pur-
poses.
Ground straps
Back Box straps
Power box
Ground straps
for base cabinets
Figure 6-2 HiPath 4500 Grounding Straps
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch06.fm
6.2.1 Grounding the Base Cabinets

To ground the base cabinets:
1. Position the individual stacks and the power box according to the site to avoid repositioning
them later.
2. Using the supplied ground straps (1), determine the correct distance between the roller
bases by inserting the straps in adjacent bases (see Figure 6-3 on page 6-3).
3. Attach the various ground straps to the left (2) and right (3) of the roller base using the
screws that are provided.
1 2 3
Figure 6-3 Installing the Ground Strap at the Base of the Cabinets
6.2.2 Installing the Ground Straps Between Cabinets
Danger
7 Never operate the system without the specified straps. The strapping serves as an
internal grounding conductor connection for the individual components.
To install the ground straps between cabinets:
1. Removing the four screws shown in (1) of Figure 6-4 on page 6-4.
2. Insert the supplied ground straps (2) and tighten the screws.
3. Depending on the system configuration, attach additional ground straps between the two
stacks and the power (3) and (4).
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch06.fm
1 2
3 4
Figure 6-4 Installing the Ground Straps Between the Cabinets
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch06.fm
Grounding the System, I.M.
6.3 Grounding the System, I.M.

To ground the system, connect a second ground conductor to the terminal connection (1) of the
main distribution frame (see Figure 6-1 on page 6-1) and connect this to the ground connection
in the roller base (see Figure 6-5 on page 6-5).
Figure 6-5 Connecting the HiPath 4500 Ground
Caution
7 You must connect the ground of the base cabinet and the main distribution frame di-
rectly to the ground busbar for undefined main distribution frames (external distribu-
tors). In this scenario, you must not connect a ground connection directly from the
main distributor frame to the base cabinet.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch06.fm
Grounding the System, U.S.
6.4 Grounding the System, U.S.

To ground the system in the U.S.:
1. Attach one end of the ground wire to the back of the cabinet as shown in Figure 6-6.
Figure 6-6 Grounding the HiPath 4500
2. Attach the other end of the ground wire to the back of the common control shelf.
3. Attach the remaining grounding wires to the expansion cabinets (see Figure 6-7 on page
6-7).
4. Secure the wires with screws.
In the U.S., for additional information about power and grounding the HiPath 4000, refer to the
HiPath 4000 V1.0 Customer Site Planning and Power Grounding Manual, G281-0725.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch06.fm
System Ground Connections
Figure 6-7 Internal Ground Connection in the HiPath 4500
6.5 System Ground Connections

Figure 6-8 on page 6-8 shows a diagram of the system ground connections. These diagrams
apply to U.S. with the exception of the connection to the MDF.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch06.fm
System Ground Connections
With MDFHX6 *) 2xCAB Stack 1

PSD
CAB600XW
~ ~
MDF MDF
HX6 HX6
6) 1) 3) 2)
FPE line 352

-A7488-B800
1)
FPE
Battery
gnye line +
-
) max. 2304 ports possible
Ground busbar
1) Ground strap C39165-A7080-C146

3) PE line becomes connected
With non-defined MDF
2xCAB Stack 1
MDF PSD
~ ~
3) 2)
FPE line 352 1)

gnye Battery
+
-
Ground
busbar 1) Ground strap C39165-A7080-C146
3) PE line is connected
Figure 6-8 Diagrams of System Ground Connections
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
Connecting the Power Supply
7 Connecting the Power Supply

7.1 Connecting to the Mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.1 Connecting to the Mains By Means of LPSUC/LPC80 Power Supply Units . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.2 Connecting to the Mains By Means of the Power Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.2 Installing a Three-Phase Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.3 Installing a Single-Phase Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.4 Overview of Network Connection 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.5 Installing a Three-Phase or Single-Phase Connection with Mid-Point Grounding, I.M.. 7-8
7.6 Overview of Network Connection 2, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.7 Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.8 AC Connection with an L80XF Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.9 DC Connection with an L80XF Module, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.10 AC-to-DC Connection with a Redundant LTUW Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7.11 DC Connection with a Redundant LTUW Cabinet, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.11.1 Connecting the Battery to the Power Box, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7.11.2 Connecting the MDF for a Non-Redundant, System, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.12 UACD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.12.1 UACD Equipment Part Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7.12.2 Connections for UACD 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
7.12.3 Connections for UACD 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7.13 UDCD, North America Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
7.13.1 UDCD Equipment Part Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7.13.2 Overview of Connections for UDCD Stack 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7.14 Connecting the Power Box to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7.15 PSDXE Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7.16 Calculating the Battery Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
Connecting to the Mains
7.1 Connecting to the Mains
Mains is a term used in Europe to describe a normal commercial outlet. Mains is go-
> ing to be used throughout this document to describe the ac outlet.
Danger
7 The grounding wire of the in-house power connector must always be connected to
the mains power socket first.
HiPath 4500 has been designed to accept four different types of power supply worldwide as
follows:
● Three-phase mains (~230 V/400 V)
● Single-phase mains for max. 2 power supply units
● Single-phase mains with midpoint grounding (~110 V/220 V) or (~120 V/240 V)
● Three-phase mains (~120 V/208 V) or (~127 V/220 V)
There are two connection variants to the mains:
● Connecting to the mains directly by means of a power supply unit (non-redundant power
supply) in the individual shelves (LPSUC/LPC80)
● Connecting to the mains by means of a power box (redundant power supply)
Danger
7 Before use and connection of the subscribers, connect the system to the protective
ground terminal properly.
Never operate the system without the mandatory grounding wire!
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
7.1.1 Connecting to the Mains By Means of LPSUC/LPC80 Power

Supply Units
In the non-redundant power supply variant, the mains connection is made directly to the various
power supply units by means of a connector strip (the connector strips are located in the base
of each stack). Depending on the local power supply (in-house connection), you must observe
the connection criteria in Figure 7-1 on page 7-3.
This part of the illustration applies to

Canada and U.S.
L1
Single-phase network L2 3-phase network
A L3
with midpoint grounding B N ~ 120V/208V
~ 110V/220V N (PE) PE ~ 127V/220V
~ 120V/240V
Fuse Fuse
16 A 16 A
L1
L2 3-phase network
L3 ~ 230V/400V
N
PE
Fuse
16A
This part of the illustration PE N L1

applies to Europe and I.M. (L3) International
GNYE BU BK1 colour code
gnye bu bk
Cable 3x1.52
1 connector strip
with up to 5 sockets
LPSUC/LPC80
Figure 7-1 LPSUC/LPC80 Mains Connection
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
7.1.2 Connecting to the Mains By Means of the Power Box
In North America, connection is made to the mains using a power cable with a plug.
> This power cable is connected to the mains socket at the factory. The mains socket
is mounted in the UACD and the strain-relieved connection cable is fed out of the
power box.
In the case of the redundant power supply variant, the connection is made to the mains using
a power connector socket on the power box. Depending on the local power supply, you may
need to make a distinction between the different connection variants.
To connect to the mains by means of the power box:
1. Remove the shielded power line with connection box from the power box (Powershelf 1 or
Powershelf 2) and remove the cover of the mains socket.
2. Plug the power cord to the mains socket.
The shielded power lines of the powershelves no longer need to be attached to the
> frame using a grounding bracket.
LTU.. 3 LTU.. 7 LTU.. 11 LTU.. 15
Power box LTU.. 2 LTU.. 6 LTU.. 10 LTU.. 14
CABPSD 2 LTU.. 1 LTU.. 5 LTU.. 9 LTU.. 13
CABPSD 1 CABCCD LTU.. 4 LTU.. 8 LTU.. 12
Powershelf 1 Powershelf 2
Figure 7-2 Connecting to the Mains By Means of the Power Box
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
Installing a Three-Phase Connection
7.2 Installing a Three-Phase Connection
Danger
7 Before you connect the three-phase power cable (~230 V/400 V), ensure that the
protective ground terminal (building ground) is connected to the system frame.
To install a three-phase connection:
1. Remove the cover to the junction box.
2. Unscrew the coupling on the junction box.
3. Insert the open end of the power cable through the junction box.
4. Strip the wires on the power cable, insert, and secure the wires to the terminals as follows:
(see Figure 7-3 and Figure 7-4 on page 7-6):
a) Attach the green/yellow wire to the (GNYE) terminal.
b) Attach the blue wire to the (BU) terminal.
c) Attach the brown wire to the (BN) terminal.
d) Attach each of the two black wires that emerge from the mains cable to a separate (BK)
terminal on the distribution socket.
e) Depending on the system configuration, repeat the same procedure sequence for the
second power socket.
5. Tighten the screw on the junction box and replace the cover.
The colored wires are as follows.
Green/yellow = grounding wire PE (GNYE)
Blue = neutral N (BU)
Brown = phase 1 L1 (BN)
Black = phase 2 L2 (BK)
Black = phase 3 L3 (BK)
Figure 7-3 UACD Junction Box
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
Installing a Single-Phase Connection
In-house network socket

Power box bk BK(L3)
bk BK(L2)
bn BN(L1)
bu BU(N)
gnye GNYE(PE)
Figure 7-4 Wiring the UACD Junction Box
7.3 Installing a Single-Phase Connection

With this type of connection, you need to make a few wiring changes in the junction box and
UACD power supply frame before you can make the connection to the in-house network.
Danger
7 Before you connect the single-phase power, ensure that the protective ground termi-
nal (building ground) is connected to the system frame.
To install a single-phase connection to a maximum UACD configuration:
a) In the junction box, bridge the BN(L1) port with BK1(L2).
b) Connect the power switches 1, 2 and 3 to the ACDPX in the power supply frame of the
UACD, as shown in the Figure 7-5 on page 7-7.
5. Replace the cover of the junction box.
6. Route the power cable to the mains.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
Overview of Network Connection 1
7.4 Overview of Network Connection 1
3-phase network ~ 230V/400V Single-phase network~ 230V

for max. of 2 power supplies
L1
L2
L3 L1
N N
PE PE
Fuse
16 A
Cable 5x2.52 Cable 3x2.52
*)
PE cable must
be connected
PE N L1 L2 L3 PE N L1 L3
L2
GNYE BU BK2 GNYE BU BK2
gnye bu BN BK1 bk2 gnye bu BN BK1 bk2
Cable with International
bn bk1 colour cable bn bk1
mains socket
C39195-A7970-B19 codes
ACDPX
PSU
1 /2 /3 CB
1
11 21
UACD
2
11 21
3
11 21
L1 2 3 N PE
*) Insert additional jumper
Figure 7-5 Three-Phase/Single-Phase Connection for Two Power Supply Units
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
Installing a Three-Phase or Single-Phase Connection with Mid-Point Grounding, I.M.
7.5 Installing a Three-Phase or Single-Phase Connection with Mid-

Point Grounding, I.M.
With this type of connection, you need to make a few wiring changes in the junction box and
also in the power supply frame before you can make the connection to the in-house network.:
Danger
7 Before you connect the power phases, make sure that the protective ground terminal
(building ground) is connected to the system frame.
To install a three-phase or single-phase connection with mid-point grounding:
a) Insert and secure the blue (BU) and brown (BN) wires together in the junction box.
b) Insert and secure both black (BK) lines together.
c) Connect the power switches 1, 2 and 3 to the ACDPX in the power supply frame UACD,
as shown in the Figure 7-6 on page 7-9.
5. Replace the cover of the junction box.
6. Route the power cable to the mains.
Danger
7 Only one HiPath 4500 DC system with a 25A fuse may be connected per stack to
the UACD.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
Overview of Network Connection 2, I.M.
7.6 Overview of Network Connection 2, I.M.
L1 Single-phase A
3-phase network network
L2 B
~ 120V/208V L3 midpoint grounding
~ 127V/220V N(PE)
N ~ 110/220V
PE ~ 120/240V
Fuse
25 A
Cable 3x42
PE cable must
be connected
*) Reconnect
N L3 N
(PE) L1 (PE) A
(N) B
GNYE BU BK2 GNYE BU BK2

Cable with gnye bu BN BK1 bk2 gnye bu BN BK1 bk2
mains socket bn bk1 bn bk1
C39195-A7970-B19 International
cable colour
codes
ACDPX
PSU
1 /2 /3 CB
1
11 21
UACD
2
11 21
3
11 21
L1 N
PE
*) For information on reconnecting, see also diagram:

a) mains socket: V32905-A2-X399
b) ACDP/ACDPX: V32905-A2-X206!
Figure 7-6 Three-Phase/Single-Phase Connection with Midpoint Grounding
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
Power Supply
7.7 Power Supply

In HiPath 4000, each cabinet is supplied with integrated AC/DC power supplies (LPC80). An
external power box is connected to the HiPath 4500 to support power distribution to the cabi-
nets.
Restrictions
> A power box connection is supported for battery management in HiPath 4000 and
later. For North America (NA) this connection is not supported.
Caution
7 The contact area of all power supply cables must be bonded with two cable fasteners
each (see Figure 7-22 on page 7-27).
The DC power supply usually has a voltage of –48 V. However, some modules require –60 V.
A power supply module (APPS) is used in this case. This –60 V power supply is only provided
for individual shelves.
Caution
7 Never plug in or unplug the APPS module when the power is on.
7.8 AC Connection with an L80XF Cabinet

In systems with non-redundant power supply, the CCDAX frame contains an LPSUC power
supply unit (2 LPSUCs in duplex mode) and each expansion box (L80XF) contains an LPC80
power supply unit. Each of these power supply units is separately fed with ~230V. A –48V out-
put voltage is generated and this in turn is transformed into several lower voltages by a second
power supply unit. (PSUP).
Figure 7-7 on page 7-11 shows a diagram of the ac connection with an L80XF cabinet.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
AC Connection with an L80XF Cabinet
Stack 1 Stack 4
UP (3) UP (15)
X1 L80XF(3) PSUP BAT L80XF(15) PSUP
Z4 Z4
LTUCX X1 LPC LTUCX
LPC BAT X2/X7 PFPS Z4 X2/X7 X1/Z4
80 80 PFPS
NGA NGA
Z24 Z24
Talk X2 Talk
Z12 Z12 X2/
Bulk Z28 Bulk Z28
Z8 Z8
5) 4)
FPE
UP (2) $ -A7650-B35
TALK L80XF(2)
FPE X n = Plug
$ -A7650-B35 Z n = Plug pin
UP (1) # = S30805-H5284-
X1 L80XF(1) PSUP * = S30805-H5298-
Z4
LTUCX X1 $ = C39195-A ....
LPC BAT X2/X7 PFPS Z4
80
NGA
Z24
Talk X2 UP (13)
Z12
TALK L80XF(13)
Bulk Z28
Z8
3)
UCD UP (12)
LTU1...15
LPS CC DAX 1 1 LPS X1 BAT L80XF(12) PSUP
UC UC Z4 LTUCX X1
X1 15 15 X1 LPC X2/X7 PFPS Z4
80
X2 NGAR X2 NGA
NGA/PFPS Z24
Z24 Talk X2
Z24 NGA Z12
ALIN
Bulk Z28
Z28 Bulk Bulk Z28 Z8
1) 1)
MDF
#-X12 MDF
#-X12 $ -A7558
$ -A7240 -B35 $ -A7240
$ -A7944-B30 $ -A7944-B30
-B500/951 2) -B500/951
UCD / UP MDF UP
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) (F)PE 1) 2) 3) 4)
$ -A7001-C55 f. "IM"
AC $ -A7001-C14 f. "NA" AC
"IM", C39334-Z7052-C22 or "IM", C39334-Z7052-C22 or
"NA", NAPSK S30807-H6586-X "NA", NAPSK S30807-H6586-X
Figure 7-7 AC Connection with an L80XF Module (Non-Redundant)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
DC Connection with an L80XF Module, I.M.
7.9 DC Connection with an L80XF Module, I.M.
Stack 1 Stack 4
*-X11 *-X11
UP (3) UP (15)
X1 L80XF(3) PSUP X1 L80XF(15) PSUP
§ §
Z4 LTUCX X1 Z4 LTUCX X1
BAT X2/X7 PFPS Z4 BAT X2/X7 PFPS Z4
Z24 NGA
Z24 NGA
Z12 X2 X2
Talk Z12 Talk
Z8 Bulk Z28 Z8 Bulk Z28
FPE
$ -A7650-B35
UP (2)
L80XF(2) X n = Plug
FPE Z n = Plug pin
$ -A7650-B35
# = S30805-H5284-
*-X11
* = S30805-H5298-
UP (1) $ = C39195-A ....
X1 L80XF(1) PSUP § = Jumper cont. strip
§
Z4 LTUCX X1 S30807-K6235-X
BAT X2/X7 PFPS Z4 UP (13)
Z24 NGA L80XF(13)
Z12 Talk X2
Z8 Bulk Z28
*-X10 *-X11
UCD LTU1...15
UP (12)
PS CC 1 1 PS §
X1 L80XF(12) PSUP
UC DAX UC Z4 LTUCX
X1 15 15 X1 BAT X2/X7 PFPS X1/Z4
X2 Z24 NGA
X2 NGAR NGA/PFPS $ -A7558
Z24 NGA Z24 -B35 Z12 Talk
ALIN X2/
Z8 Z28
Z28 Z28 Bulk
Bulk Bulk
MDF
#-X12 MDF
#-X12
$ -A7240
$ -A7944-B30 -B500/951 $ -A7944-B30 $ -A7240
MDF DC-connec- Terminal+cable -B500/951
(F)PE tion -48V $ -A7954-B33
Figure 7-8 DC Connection with an L80XF Module (Non-Redundant), I.M.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
AC-to-DC Connection with a Redundant LTUW Cabinet
7.10 AC-to-DC Connection with a Redundant LTUW Cabinet

In systems with redundant power supply, the CCDAX cabinet contains two PSUC power supply
units in duplex mode and each expansion box (L80XF) contains two PSUP power supply units.
A –48 V output is provided to each power supply from a separate power box using the back-
plane, that is, the ~230 Vac is directly connected to the power box and not to the system.
An ac-powered HiPath 4500 supports one stack of two-cabinet UACD.
An external battery connection can also be used to support the power supply.
In North America, an external battery is not supported.

>
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
Stack 1 Stack 4
*-X12 *-X11 *-X12 *-X11
UPR (3) UPR (15)
PSUP LTUW(3) PSUP PSUP LTUW (15) PSUP
X1 LTUCX X1 X1 LTUCX X1
X2 / X7 X2 / X7 Z4
PFPS Z4 Z4
Z4 PFPS
X2 X2 X2 X2
Bulk Bulk
Z28 Z28 Z28 Z28
Talk Talk
*-X12 *-X11 FPE

FPE $ -A7650-B35
UPR (2) $ -A7650-B35
PSUP LTUW(3) PSUP
X1 LTUCX X1
X2 / X7
PFPS Z4
Z4
X2 X2
Bulk
Z28 Z28
Talk
PFPS *-X12 *-X11
*-X10 *-X15
UCD MDF UPR (12)
LTU1..15
PS CC 1 1 PS PSUP LTUW (12) PSUP
UC DAX UC
X1 LTUCX X1
X1 15 15 X1 X2 / X7 Z4
NGAR Z4 PFPS
X2 PFPS
NGA X2 X2
X2
Z24 Z24 $ -A7558 Bulk
ALIN -B35 Z28 Z28
Z28 Z28 Talk
Bulk Bulk
(F)PE UACD (2)
1 2 1 2 L L A
Bulk Talk C
P P D
PDPX2 C C P AC
X
BAMX2 EBCCB to the battery
UACD (1) Cable cross-section

X n = Plug See table “Battery Cable Cross-
1 2 1 2 L L A section“
Z n = Plug pin Bulk Talk P P
C
D
* = S30805-H5298- PDPX2 C C P AC
X
$ = C39195-A ....
BAMX1 EBCCB to the battery
Figure 7-9 AC-to-DC Connection with a Redundant LTUW-BGR, I.M.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
*-X12 *-X11 *-X12 *-X11

UPR (3) UPR (15)
X2 / X7 X2 / X7 Z4
PFPS Z4 Z4
Z4 PFPS
X2 X2 X2 X2
Bulk Bulk
Z28 Z28 Z28 Z28
Talk Talk
Stack 1 Stack 4
*-X12 *-X11 FPE
FPE $ -A7650-B35
UPR (2) $ -A7650-B35
PSUP LTUW(3) PSUP
X1 LTUCX X1
X2 / X7
PFPS Z4
Z4
X2 X2
Bulk
Z28 Z28
Talk
PFPS *-X12 *-X11
*-X10 *-X15
UCD MDF UPR (12)
LTU1..15
UC DAX UC
X1 LTUCX X1
X1 15 15 X1 X2 / X7 Z4
NGAR Z4 PFPS
X2 PFPS
NGA X2 X2
X2
Z24 Z24 $ -A7558 Bulk
ALIN -B35 Z28 Z28
Z28 Z28 Talk
Bulk Bulk
MDF UACD (2)

(F)PE
1 2 1 2 L L A
C
Bulk Talk P P D
PDPX2 C C P AC
X
NORAC kit
BAMX2 EBCCB for "NA"
UACD (1)
1 2 1 L L A
X n = Plug 2 C
Bulk Talk P P D
Z n = Plug pin P
PDPX2 C C AC
* = S30805-H5298- X
$ = C39195-A .... NORAC kit
BAMX1 EBCCB for "NA"
Figure 7-10 AC-to-DC Connection with a Redundant LTUW Cabinet, North America
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
DC Connection with a Redundant LTUW Cabinet, I.M.
7.11 DC Connection with a Redundant LTUW Cabinet, I.M.
Stack 1 Stack 4
*-X12 *-X11 *-X12 *-X11
UPR (3) UPR (15)
X2 / X7 X2 / X7 Z4
PFPS Z4 Z4
Z4 PFPS
X2 X2 X2 X2
Bulk Bulk
Z28 Z28 Z28 Z28
Talk Talk
*-X12 *-X11 FPE

FPE $ -A7650-B35
UPR (1) $ -A7650-B35
PSUP LTUW(1) PSUP
X1 LTUCX X1
X2 / X7
PFPS Z4
Z4
X2 X2
Bulk
Z28 Z28
Talk
PFPS *-X12 *-X11
*-X10 *-X15
UCD MDF UPR (12)
LTU1..15
UC DAX UC
X1 LTUCX X1
X1 15 15 X1 X2 / X7 Z4
NGAR Z4 PFPS
X2 PFPS
NGA X2 X2
X2
Z24 Z24 Bulk
ALIN Z28 Z28
Z28 Z28 Talk
Bulk Bulk
$ -A7558
-B35
Terminal+cable
MDF $ -A7954-B33
(F)PE
DC Terminal+cable DC connection
connection $ -A7954-B33 X n = Plug -48V
- 48V Z n = Plug pin
* = S30805-H5298-
$ = C39195-A ....
Figure 7-11 DC Connection with Redundant LTUW-BGR, I.M.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
7.11.1 Connecting the Battery to the Power Box, I.M.

To connect an external battery to the HiPath 4500:
1. Connect the 0 V supply from the battery to the roller base of the power box (see Figure 7-
12).
The arrows indicate the points
where a 0 V battery connection
is made to the power box.
Figure 7-12 0 V Battery Connection
2. Attach the –48 V supply from the external battery to the cable drawn from the system (see
Figure 7-13).
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
EBCCB 1
NG
(EBCCB 2)
LPC
ON-
OFF
BAMX1
X6 (X7)
-48 V sense
PDPX1
(PDPX2)
POWER
SHARE
Fuse
ON-
70 A
OFF
BAMX1
(BAMX 2)
UBATT
Items in parentheses indicate

Ext. batt.
double configuration in the
-48 V power box.
Figure 7-13 External Battery Connection to Power Box (Back View)
7.11.2 Connecting the MDF for a Non-Redundant, System, I.M.

The power supply for the main distribution frame is branched from extension boxes 1 and 2 and
connected to the main distribution frame by means of fuse modules (Si1/Si2), each with 1.6 A
fuses (see Figure 7-14 on page 7-19 and Figure 7-15 on page 7-19). The –48 V connectors
from the MDFs can be combined as required. Ensure that the number of MDFs connected at a
fuse does not exceed the overall power requirement for each 1.6 A fuse.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
MDFHX6 MDFHX6
1/2/3
CCDAX
4/5/6
SCSI
Backplane
GND
-48 V
-48 V -48 V
Exp. 1 Exp. 2
-48 V -48 V
Si1 Si2 1.6 A each
Figure 7-14 Example of a –48 V Connection for Main Distribution Frame (Non-Redundant)
The arrows indicate the -48 V cables

and fuse module (Si1, Si2). The cable
from Si1 is connected to MDF 1/2/3.
The cable from Si2 is connected to
MDF 4/5/6.
Figure 7-15 -48 V Fuse Module for MDF (Non-Redundant)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
UACD
The arrows indicate the connec-

tion for -48 V on the main distri-
bution frame. The -48 V cables
from the various fuses must be
connected here.
If necessary, this connection
can also be connected to other
main distribution frames (up to a
maximum power consumption
of 1.6 A per fuse).
Figure 7-16 -48 V Main Distribution Frame Connection
7.12 UACD
Figure 7-17 shows the UACD ac-to-dc power box.
The EBCCB is not used in the U.S.

>
X
M
EBCCB
BA
Stack 1,2,/3.4
PDPX2
ACDPX
LPC
LPC
LPC
Figure 7-17 UACD for a Redundant LTUW Cabinet
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
UACD
7.12.1 UACD Equipment Part Numbers

Table 7-1 lists the equipment and corresponding part numbers of the UACD.
Qty. Name Part number Description

1 UACD (1) S30805-G5405-X Power supply and distribution cabinet for
HiPath 4500
1 ACDPX S30050-K7028-X1 Power supply field
3 LPC, NG-Mod- S30807-H6120-X1/X2 Component parts for main power supply
ule modules with cable type
1 PDPX2 S30807-E6250-X Terminal field
1 BAMX1 S30805-H5401-X11 Battery Manager 1, kit
BAMX1 S30807-K6215-X1 Battery Manager 1
BAEX S30050-Q7048-X Battery Control and Power Fail Management
1 EBCCB S30807-K6710-X Battery connection with safety cutout
1 UACD (2) S30805-G5405-X Power supply and distribution cabinet for Hi-
Path 4500
1 ACDPX S30050-K7028-X1 Power supply field
3 LPC, NG-Mod- S30807-H6120-X1/X2 Component parts for main power supply
ule modules with cable type
1 PDPX2 S30807-E6250-X Terminal field
1 BAMX2 S30805-H5401-X12 Battery Manager 2, kit
BAMX2 S30807-K6215-X2 Battery Manager 2
1 EBCCB S30807-K6710-X Battery connection with safety cutout
Table 7-1 UACD Equipment Part Numbers for a Redundant LTUW Cabinet
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
UACD
7.12.2 Connections for UACD 1
Line Line Line

L N PE L N PE L N PE Power supply unit LPC
CP1 CP2 CP3

14A 14A 14A
ACDPX
LPC(1) LPC(2) LPC(3)

*) LPC, DC output:
1 15 13 1 15 13 1 15 13
+ 2 16 - + 2 16 - + 2 16 - with jumper--> 53.5V
without jumper --> 54.7V
*)
LPC1 LPC2 LPC3
40A 40A Bulk 1

FCS
NGA1 40A 40A 2
NGA2 to stack
40A 40A 1
1-2
Talk
NGA3
40A 2
- 48V
70A
NGA POW.
BATT. PDPX2 SHARE
IN
1)
X2 BAEX X8
+
-
X7 X6 X1 X3 X9
BATT. BAMX1
INPUT
BAEXF
NGAR
NGA1
NGA2
NGA3
NGA
WRA
- 48V sense
- 48V sense
PFI
70A 14A
CCDAX-BGR PDPX2 BAMX2 EBCCB

ALIN cable
CABPSD 2
CABPSD 2
X8 -> contactor control output CAB1 Battery
X9 -> contactor control output CAB2
1) -> contactor control input
Figure 7-18 UACD 1 Connections
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
UACD
7.12.3 Connections for UACD 2
Line Line Line

Power supply unit LPC PE N L PE N L PE N L
CP1 CP2 CP3

14A 14A 14A
ACDPX
LPC(1) LPC(2) LPC(3)

PE
13 15 1 13 15 1 13 15 1
*) LPC, DC output: - 16 2 + - 16 2 + - 16 2 +
with jumper --> 53.5V
without jumper --> 54.7V *)
LPC1 LPC2 LPC3
1 40A 40A
Bulk
FCS
to stack 2 40A 40A
3-4 1 40A 40A

Talk
40A
- 48V
70A
POW.
SHARE NGA
PDPX2 BATT.
IN
NGA3
NGA2
NGA1
+
-
BAMX2 BATT.
INPUT
1)
14A 70A
EBCCB
BAMX1
X9 BAEX X3
to BAEX CABPSD 1
CABPSD 1
Battery X9 -> contactor control output CAB2
1) -> contactor control input
Figure 7-19 UACD 2 Connections
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
UDCD, North America Only
7.13 UDCD, North America Only

Figure 7-20 shows the UDCD dc-to-dc power box.
Stack 1,2/3,4
ICBP
Zytron
Zytron
Zytron
ODP
BUA
Figure 7-20 UDCD DC-to-DC Power Box (North America Only)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
7.13.1 UDCD Equipment Part Numbers

Table 7-2 lists the equipment and corresponding part numbers of the UACD.
Pc Name Part number Remark

1 BUA S30805-G5409-X Base unit assembly
1 UDCD (1) S30805-G5406-X Unit DC Distribution

1 ICBP S30807-E6588-X Input circuit breaker panel
3 Zytron-Module S30122-H5308-X DC-to-DC converter
1 ODP S30807-E6589-X Output distribution panel
DCPFX S30807-Q6220-X DC power fail card
1 UDCD (2) S30805-G5406-X Unit DC Distribution

1 ICBP S30807-E6588-X Input circuit breaker panel
3 Zytron-Module S30122-H5308-X DC-to-DC converter
1 ODP S30807-E6589-X Output distribution panel
DCPFX S30807-Q6220-X DC power fail card
Table 7-2 Equipment for UDCD DC-to-DC Power Box
7.13.2 Overview of Connections for UDCD Stack 1

Figure 7-21 on page 7-26 shows a connection diagram of UDCD stack 1.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
(+) COM. –48 Vdc

EMI Filter MODE RET
(-) CHOKE
CB safety
100A ground
- + - +
BUA
J2 J1
CB1 CB2 CB3 ICBP UDCD (1)

30A 30A 30A
J5 J4 J3
J6 J6 J6
Zytron Zytron Zytron
(1) (2) (3)
+- +- +-
J7 J7 J7
J9 J8 J9 J8
J21 J20 J19
- 48V 40A J18 Talk
40A J17 Bulk To stack (1)
J16 RTN
J7 J6 J5 ODP
E3
DCPFX
J2 J1
CB1 CB2 CB3

30A 30A 30A
ICBP UDCD (2)
J5 J4 J3
J6 J6 J6
Zytron Zytron Zytron
(1) (2) (3)
+- +- +-
J7 J7 J7
J9 J8 J9 J8
J21 J20 J19
- 48V 40A J18 Talk
40A J17 Bulk

To stack (2)
J16 RTN
J7 J6 J5
E4 ODP To CCDAX or
DCPFX E3 Stack 2
DCPFX E4
Figure 7-21 Overview of UDCD Stack 1 Connections
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
Connecting the Power Box to the System
7.14 Connecting the Power Box to the System

To connect the power box to the system:
1. Attach the cable from connector X1 in the BAMX1 (BAEX) to connector ALIN in the CAB-
CCD cabinet of stack1.
2. From PDPX1 (stack 1/2) and PDPX 2 (stack 3/4), connect one –48 V TALK and one –48 V
BULK cable to the relevant –48 V connectors on the lower shelves at the back of each
stack. Refer to Table 7-3 and Figure 7-22 on page 7-27 to connect the bulk and talk cables
from the BAMX to the HiPath 4500 cabinets.
Stack 1 (CABCCD) Stack 2 (LTU..4) Stack 3 (LTU..8) Stack 4 (LTU..12)

TALK (PDPX 1) to TALK NEW CAB (PDPX TALK (PDPX 2) to TALK NEW CAB (PDPX
centre –48 V connec- 1) to centre –48 V con- centre –48 V connec- 2) to centre –48 V con-
tor nector tor nector
BULK (PDPX 1) to BULK NEW CAB (PDPX BULK (PDPX 2) to TALK NEW CAB (PDPX
right –48 V connector 1) to right –48 V con- right –48 V connector 2) to right –48 V con-
nector nector
Table 7-3 List of –48 V BAMX to a HiPath 4500 Cabinet Cable Connections, Redundant
Refer also to the “Section 7.15, “PSDXE Connection”, on page 7-29” for additional information.
Back
LTU.. 15 LTU.. 11 LTU.. 7 LTU.. 3

Power box
LTU.. 14 LTU.. 10 LTU.. 6 LTU.. 2
LTU.. 13 LTU.. 9 LTU.. 5 LTU.. 1
LTU.. 12 LTU.. 8 LTU.. 4 CABCCD
TALK BULK TALK BULK TALK BULK TALK BULK

NEW CAB NEW CAB PDPX 2 PDPX 2 NEW CAB NEW CAB PDPX 1 PDPX 1
PDPX 2 PDPX 2 PDPX 1 PDPX 1
-48 V HVT
Figure 7-22 –48 V Connections from PDPX to the Shelves, Redundant
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
Connecting the Power Box to the System
7.14.1 Connecting the MDF for a Redundant System, I.M.

The power supply for the main distribution frame is branched from the CABCCD (–48 V con-
nector unit TALK PDPX1) and connected to the main distribution frame by means of two 1.6 A
fuses (see Figure 7-23).
The –48 V connectors from the MDFs can be combined as required. Ensure that the number
of MDFs connected at a fuse does not exceed the overall power requirement for each 1.6 A
fuse.
Stack 1
LTU.. 3
LTU.. 2
LTU.. 1
CABCCD
-48 V
TALK
PDPX 1 -48 V MDF
Figure 7-23 –48 V Connection Unit for MDF, Redundant
The main distribution frame connection of –48 V is the same as that described in the Section
7.11.2, “Connecting the MDF for a Non-Redundant, System, I.M.”, on page 7-18.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
PSDXE Connection
7.15 PSDXE Connection

Figure 7-24 shows the connectors in the PSDXE required for connecting the power supply and
the battery manager to the system.
PSDXE -48 V BULK

Power box 1 X7 BAMX2
(back view) X2
X6 BAMX1 -48 V TALK
NGA X3
PDPX -48 V BULK
Power box 2
X8 X1 ALIN
-48 V TALK NEW CAB
BAMX 2 CCDAX-BGR POWER
X9
Power box 2 BAEX NEW CAB SHARE
Battery IN
EBCCB
UBATT
NGA
BAMX 1 PDPX
Figure 7-24 PSDXE Connection
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch07.fm
Calculating the Battery Cabling
7.16 Calculating the Battery Cabling
Battery cable –––––– mm2 ––––––– System

power
cross-section 16 2
25 2
35 2
50 2
70 2 952
2x70 2
at Uv
Stack 1 PSU2 15 23 32 46 65 84 130 46 A

+
Stack 2 PSU3 10 15 22 31 43 56 86 69 A
Cable
lngth 1.5V
Stack 3 PSU4 (m) 23 A
+ PSU5 15 23 32 46 65 84 130 46 A
Stack 4
PSU6 10 15 22 31 43 56 86 69 A
Figure 7-25 Battery Cable Cross-Section
● Minimum system voltage 42.5 V at the BAEX module (in the BAMX1 in CABPSD)
● Permissible voltage drop (Uv) on the battery cable, from the terminal to the battery, if the
battery is to be discharged to 44V (1.83V/battery
● The system current is based on the power supply units output as follows:
– Maximum 2 UACDs with up to 6 power supply units (PSUs)
– For every PSU -->continuous load 23 A
– Maximum 23 A x n (PSU) (power supplies are in accordance to Figure 7-26)
Caution
7 If possible, the battery cable cross-section should not be less than 70 mm2, even in
configurations with fewer than 6 PSUs. A cross-section of at least 70 mm2 if the con-
figuration is subsequently expanded to the maximum of 6 PSUs in order to ensure
proofing against short-circuits. Expansions should always provide for a certain re-
serve, as otherwise, the battery cable must be reinforced or replaced if the voltage
drop (Uv) is exceeded at 1.5 V.
2 x # (m) x * (qty.) x 23 (A) ?

= = ? mm2 per +/ - cable
1.5 (Uv) x 58(æ) 87
The formula must be supplemented with two #) = Distance between system & battery
values:
*) = Required number of PSUs
Figure 7-26 Formula for Calculating Battery Cable Cross-Section
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch08.fm
Installing Cables
Installing Signal Cables
8 Installing Cables
This chapter provides instructions for installing cables on the HiPath 4500.
8.1 Installing Signal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.1.1 Overview of CCDAX to L80XF/LTUW Simplex Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.1.2 Overview of CCDAX to L80XF/LTUW Duplex Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.1.3 Overview of CCDAX Periphery Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8.2 Routing the Power Cables on an AC-Powered, Non-Redundant HiPath 4500 . . . . . . . 8-9
8.3 Routing the Power Cables on an AC-Powered, Redundant HiPath 4500 . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.4 Routing the Power Cables from the UACD and UDCD to the HiPath 4000. . . . . . . . . 8-13
8.5 Connecting to the LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8.6 Installing the Service Alarm Cable and Trunk Bypass on the HiPath 4500 . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8.1 Installing Signal Cables

Signal cables are referred to as LTU signal cables. Signal cables should already be connected
when the system is shipped out of the factory. Should the cables become loose or removed dur-
ing transit, install the signal cables on the HiPath 4500 as follows:
1.
Caution
7 To avoid a short-circuit, ensure that the power on the system is off before con-
necting and removing the LTU cables.
2. Refer to Table 8-1 on page 8-1 to connect signal cables from backplane connectors of the
expansion (LTU) cabinets (see Figure 8-2 on page 8-3 and Figure 8-2 on page 8-3) to the
CCDAX backplane connectors (see Figure 8-3 on page 8-4 and Figure 8-4 on page 8-5).
System Type From To

Simplex LTU.. 1 - LTU.. 7 (slot73/connector 2) CCDAX LTUS 1A (slot88/connectors
3 - 9)
LTU.. 8 - LTU.. 15 (slot73/connector 2) CCDAX LTUS 2A (slot76/connectors
2 - 9)
Duplex LTU.. 1 - LTU.. 7 (slot73/connector 7) CCDAX LTUS 1B (slot121/connectors
3 - 9)
LTU.. 8 - LTU.. 15 (slot73/connector 7) LTU.. 8 - LTU.. 15 (slot73/connector 7)
Table 8-1 Signal Cable Connections
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch08.fm
Installing Cables
3. All cables that lead to the main distribution frames (I.M.) must be attached to the relevant
stack frames with cable fasteners (see Figure 8-5 on page 8-5).
Figure 8-1 LTUW Backplane (Connectors 2 and 7)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch08.fm
Installing Cables
MDF
MDF
MDF
MDF
MDF
MDF
MDF
MDF
MDF
MDF
MDF
MDF
MDF
MDF
MDF
MDF
3
Slot 121 5 Slot 25

TALK BULK
6
7 LTU..
LTUS 1B
LTUS 1A
RG/WG RG/WG
8
ST. 3
ST. 3
BULK 9
To CCDAX Simplex
Slot 73 Duplex
Figure 8-2 LTUW Backplane Connector Designation
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch08.fm
Installing Cables
1 1 1 1
9 9 9 9
Figure 8-3 CCDAX Backplane
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch08.fm
Installing Cables
Slot 121 Slot 109 Slot 88 Slot 76
ASW
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
V24/2
SCSI
4 0V 4 4 4
NGARL
PF1
0V
5 5 5 5
-48 V
-48 V
V24/3
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
ALIN
8 8 8 8
V24/4
9 9 9 9
LTUS 1B LTUS 2B LTUS 1A LTUS 2A

Figure 8-4 CCDAX Backplane Connector Designation
This figure shows the cable attachment points

on the stack.
Figure 8-5 Attaching Cables on the HiPath 4500
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch08.fm
Installing Cables
8.1.1 Overview of CCDAX to L80XF/LTUW Simplex Connection
S30267-
7 15 15 15
Z315A
KAST name LTU A LTU A LTU A LTU A LTU A LTU A LTU A LTU A LTU A LTU A LTU A LTU A LTU A LTU A LTU A
L80XF / 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
LTUW
073 / 073 / 073 / 073 / 073 / 073 / 073 / 073 / 073 / 073 / 073 / 073 / 073 / 073 / 073 /
Slot
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Slot 088 / 088 / 088 / 088 / 088 / 088 / 088 / 076 / 076 / 076 / 076 / 076 / 076 / 076 / 076 /
CCDAX 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU
LTU 1 LTU 2 LTU 3 LTU 4 LTU 5 LTU 6 LTU 7 LTU 8 LTU 9
10 11 12 13 14 15
KAST name LTUS 1A LTUS 2A
LTU 9
10 11 12 13 14 15
Slot 076 / 076 / 076 / 076 / 076 / 076 / 076 /
CCDAX 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Slot 073 / 3
L80XF / 7..8 6..9 5.. 4.. 3.. 2.. 1..
LTUW 10 11 12 13 14
KAST name LTU Aw
S30267-Z315-
15.. 15.. 15.. 7..
A
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch08.fm
Installing Cables
8.1.2 Overview of CCDAX to L80XF/LTUW Duplex Connections
S30267-
7 15 15 15
Z315A
KAST name LTU B LTU B LTU B LTU B LTU B LTU B LTU B LTU B LTU B LTU B LTU B LTU B LTU B LTU B LTU B
L80XF / 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
LTUW
073 / 073 / 073 / 073 / 073 / 073 / 073 / 073 / 073 / 073 / 073 / 073 / 073 / 073 / 073 /
Slot
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Slot 121 / 121 / 121 / 121 / 121 / 121 / 121 / 109 / 109 / 109 / 109 / 109 / 109 / 109 / 109 /
CCDAX 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
LTU 1 LTU 2 LTU 3 LTU 4 LTU 5 LTU 6 LTU 7 LTU 8 LTU 9
10 11 12 13 14 15
KAST name LTUS 1B LTUS 2B
LTU 9
10 11 12 13 14 15
Slot 109 / 109 / 109 / 109 / 109 / 109 / 109 /
CCDAX 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Slot 073 / 8
L80XF / 7 . . 8 6 . . 9 5 . . 10 4 . . 11 3 . . 12 2 . . 13 1 . . 14
LTUW
KAST name LTU Bw
S30267-
15.. 15.. 15.. 7..
Z315A
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch08.fm
Installing Cables
8.1.3 Overview of CCDAX Periphery Connections
ext. SCSI - - - - - - - - Operating terminal / Modem - - Reference MDF

Mod. ext. ------ Clock
synch/asynch.
(Front cable)
(Front cable)
(Front cable)
(Front cable)
(Front cable)
(Front cable)
synch./
asynch.
asynch.
asynch.
internal
Slot 040/ 026 066 066 066 058 085 118 076 /
CCDAX Name /
046/058 091
052 SCSI V24/ V24/ V24/ DPC5 DPC5 MTSC MTSC 1
Mod. HUBC 2 DPC5 2 3 4 G G ASW
KAST name LAN SCSI SCSI V24/ V24/ V24/ V24/ V24/28 V24/28 ref.Clo ref.Clo MDF
28 28 28 28 ck ck
C39195-Z7202- 30
A..
C39195-Z7603- 20 8
A..
S30267-Z311-A Don-
gle
S30267-Z314-A BTT BTT BTT BTT BTT
S30257-Z7752-A Mod. Mod. Mod. Mod. Mod.
S30267-Z304-A internal / external 9 / 40 9 / 40
S30267-Z317-A 50 /
100
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch08.fm
Installing Cables
Routing the Power Cables on an AC-Powered, Non-Redundant HiPath 4500
8.2 Routing the Power Cables on an AC-Powered, Non-Redundant

HiPath 4500
To route the power cables in an ac-powered, non-redundant HiPath 4500:
1. Ensure that the system is off.
2. If your system have redundant CPUs, plug the power cables into the ac-to-dc shelf power
shelf supplies (LPC80).
3. Route the power cables through the metal knock-out (see Figure 8-6) down to the base uni-
tassembly (BUA), under the CC80F shelf.
4. Secure the power cables with tie-wraps on the metal knock-outs.
5. Plug the other end of the power cables to the ac outlet in the BUA.
6. Follow steps 2 through 9 on page 8-10 in Section 8.3, “Routing the Power Cables on an
AC-Powered, Redundant HiPath 4500”.
Power
cable
Power
cable Tie-wrap
Metal Metal
cutout cutout
Figure 8-6 AC-Powered HiPath 4500 with Redundant CPU
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch08.fm
Installing Cables
Routing the Power Cables on an AC-Powered, Redundant HiPath 4500
8.3 Routing the Power Cables on an AC-Powered, Redundant HiPath

4500
The bulk and talk circuit breaker cables connect to the UACD or UDCD at one end. At the Hi-
Path 4500 side, you need to connect the bulk and talk circuit breaker cables as follows (see
Figure 8-7 on page 8-11):
2. At the back of the CCDAX cabinet, install the bulk circuit breaker cable onto the X10 con-
nector then daisy-chain it upwards to the X12 connectors as shown in Figure 8-7 on page
8-11).
Ensure that the cables are locked down, otherwise, the LTU shelf that is connect-
7 ed to is not going to function properly.
The top blue connector bulk cable on top of the CCDAX cabinet connects to the
> bottom blue connector of the LTUW cabinet. The top blue connector bulk cable
on the LTUW cabinet connects to the bottom blue connector of the upper LTUW
cabinet and so on.
3. At every cabinet, connect and tie-wrap the shielded portion of the –48 Vdc bulk input power
cables to the cabinet frame (see Figure 8-8 on page 8-12).
4. At every cabinet, connect the –48 Vdc bulk input power cable to the shielded ground at the
left side of each cabinet.
5. If you have redundant power on the system, route the other two –48 V dc bulk cables over
to the left side of the CCDAX cabinet and tie-wrap the shielded portion of the cable to the
shielded ground.
6. Connect the –48 Vdc input talk circuit breaker cables to the X11 connector of the LTUW
shelf.
7. Daisy chain the–48 Vdc input talk circuit breaker cables to the upper LTUW shelves (see
Figure 8-7 on page 8-11).
8. At every cabinet, connect the –48 Vdc talk input power cable to the shielded ground at the
left side of each cabinet.
9. At the back of the CCDAX cabinet, route the bottom blue connector –48 V dc bulk cable
(input) to the –48 Vdc connector at the back of the output distribution panel of the UACD
or UDCD.
In the UACD, this cable is called the ALUM cable, and it plugs to the TBD connector.
In the UDCD, this cable is called the power fail cable, and it plugs to the DCPFX1-E3 con-
nector.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch08.fm
Installing Cables
–48 Vdc talk

circuit –48 Vdc bulk
breakers output power
and power cable
cable
X11 Bulk
connectors Shielded
ground
X12 bulk
connectors
X10 bulk
Shielded
connectors
ground
X## bulk
connector –48 Vdc bulk
input power
cable
–48 Vdc bulk

output power
cable
ALUM or power fail bulk cable

–48 Vdc power for redundant
going to the UACD or UDCD
common control
Figure 8-7 Power Cable Connections
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch08.fm
Installing Cables
Output to
LTUW
shelf
Input from Tie-wraps

UACD or
UDCD
Shielded
ground
Figure 8-8 Connecting the Bulk Power
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch08.fm
Installing Cables
Routing the Power Cables from the UACD and UDCD to the HiPath 4000
8.4 Routing the Power Cables from the UACD and UDCD to the
HiPath 4000
Caution
1 Ensure that the power is off.
All internal cabling for the UACD and UDCD should be complete when the equipment goes out
of the factory. The output power cables on the UACD and UDCD are also already connected
on the power shelves.
In the UACD, the output power cable (ALUM) must be connected to the CCDAX (bottom blue
connector of the bulk circuit breaker (see Figure 8-7 on page 8-11).
In the UDCD, the output power cable (power fail signal) must be connected to the CCDAX (bot-
tom blue connector of the bulk circuit breaker (see Figure 8-7 on page 8-11).
8.5 Connecting to the LAN

Refer to Section 10.6.3, “Connecting External Devices for Teleworking”, on page 10-23.
8.6 Installing the Service Alarm Cable and Trunk Bypass on the
HiPath 4500
To install the service alarm cable and trunk bypass on the Hipath 4500:
1. At the backplane, connect one end of the cabinet telephony cable to the DSCX mounting
location.
2. Terminate correctly at the MDF. Refer to DSCX board punch-down sequence in the HiPath
4000 Service Manual.
3. Connect the trunk failure transfer alarm (ALUM) pair to the bypass unit contact input pair.
This contact is closed during normal condition. When the alarm is activated, the
> contact opens.
4. Ensure that the trunk bypass is set for Normal Closed Mode.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch08.fm
Installing Cables
Installing the Service Alarm Cable and Trunk Bypass on the HiPath 4500
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch09.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
9 External Cabling Assemblies

This chapter provides installation and cabling diagrams for the HIPath 4500. Specific installa-
tion diagrams for the HG 3800 and IPDA are located in the HG 3800 and IPDA chapters. Unless
otherwise noted, all diagrams apply to both U.S. and I.M. installations.
9.1 MDFHX6 Main Distribution Frame Assembly, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

9.2 Cabling from the LTU to the MDF, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.3 Overvoltage Protection of the Modules, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.4 MDF Cable Connections, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.5 Connecting the Signal or Alarm Cables to the MDF, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.6 Subscriber Line or Trunk Module Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.6.1 Subscriber Line Module Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.6.1.1 Connecting the Subscriber Line Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.6.2 Trunk Module Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9.6.2.1 Connecting the Trunk Modules to the MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
9.6.2.2 Connection to MDF with DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
9.6.2.3 Connecting to the MDF with CDR and DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
9.6.2.4 Connecting to the MDF with CDR but without DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
9.7 Connecting CMI Fuse Modules, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
9.8 Creating a Strapping List, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
9.8.1 System Assignment 16/24 DA Splitting Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9.8.2 Network Assignment 25/35 DA Strapping Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
This section describes the assembly of the main distribution frames and the cables that must
be connected from the MDF splitting strips to the corresponding LTU slots in the HiPath 4500
(also refer to the cable plugging list that accompanies the system).
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch09.fm
MDFHX6 Main Distribution Frame Assembly, I.M.
9.1 MDFHX6 Main Distribution Frame Assembly, I.M.
Carrier for special modules

(ALUM relay, automatic cutout
etc.)
B
B/F:
Plate (attachment for internal
and external ground cable)
C
C01-C16:
24 DA splitting strips (internal
connections for system LTUE
network)
D001-D19:
A1 A2
35 DA strapping connectors
(external connections for server, A
A3 PFT4
AC3, network and postal net-
work)
Figure 9-1 Assembly of the MDFHX6 Main Distribution Frame
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch09.fm
Cabling from the LTU to the MDF, I.M.
9.2 Cabling from the LTU to the MDF, I.M.

Figure 9-2 shows the cabling diagram from the LTU to the MDF.
SLOT121
SLOT115
SLOT108
SLOT103
SLOT097
SLOT091
SLOT085
SLOT079
SLOT067
SLOT061
SLOT055
SLOT049
SLOT043
SLOT037
SLOT031
SLOT025
16 09 08 01
LTU.. 1
MDF 1
Back view
1 per 24 pair a/b 24

MDF splitting strip 16
1 24
Figure 9-2 LTU to MDF Cabling
Caution
7 In new installations, always connect shielding wires. Do not modify existing shielding
wires if a main distribution frame is already being used. Do not use shielding wires
for ground distribution. Use the YV 2x0.5/0.9 jumper wires for jumpering.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch09.fm
Overvoltage Protection of the Modules, I.M.
9.3 Overvoltage Protection of the Modules, I.M.

Overvoltage protection is integrated in the module for 24DA cables. The cable connectors do
not contain any other overvoltage protection devices.
Where necessary, you can use overvoltage protectors to protect external cables to the main
distribution frame against atmospheric pressure.
SWU MDF
FPE cable in accordance
with VDE 0800 Part 2 to
VDE 0800 Teil2
Cable with overvoltage

KAST 24DA protection in the MDF
TM../SLM..
Cable without over-

LTUW voltage protection in the
MDF
& = Splitting strip (MDFHX) C39334 - A166 - A1 / A2

$ = Strapping connector (MDFHX)C39334 - A166 - A3 / A7
Figure 9-3 Varistors and Overvoltage Protectors
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch09.fm
MDF Cable Connections, I.M.
9.4 MDF Cable Connections, I.M.
The PIN assignment between the LTUW backplane is different from is different to the
> cable connectors!
Connect Connect Connect

Pin Cable Pin Cable Pin Cable
Mod Cab Wire Cable Color Mod Cab Wire Cable Color Mod Cab Wire Cable Color
Pin Wire Ring Pin Wire Ring Pin Wire Ring
1 20 1a White--Blue 17 4 9a Red--Brown 43 58 17a Yellow--Orange
23 38 1b Blue--White 18 3 9b Brown--Red 44 57 17b Orange--Yellow
3 18 2a White-- Orange 19 2 10a Red--Gray 45 56 18a Yellow--Green
4 17 2b Orange--White 20 1 10b Gray--Red 46 55 18b Green--Yellow
5 16 3a White--Green 24 37 11a Black--Blue 47 54 19a Yellow--Brown
6 15 3b Green--White 25 36 11b Blue--Black 48 53 19b Brown--Yellow
7 14 4a White--Brown 26 35 12a Black--Orange 49 52 20a Yellow--Gray
8 13 4b Brown--White 27 34 12b Orange--Black 50 51 20b Gray--Yellow
9 12 5a White--Gray 29 32 13a Black--Green 51 50 21a Violet--Blue
10 11 5b Gray--White 30 31 13b Green--Black 52 49 21b Blue--Violet
11 10 6a Red--Blue 31 30 14a Black--Brown 53 48 22a Violet--Orange
12 9 6b Blue--Red 32 29 14b Brown--Black 54 47 22b Orange--Violet
13 8 7a Red--Orange 34 27 15a Black--Gray 55 46 23a Violet--Green
14 7 7b Orange--Red 35 26 15b Gray--Back 56 45 23b Green--Violet
15 6 8a Red--Green 37 24 16a Yellow--Blue 57 44 24a Violet--Brown
16 5 8b Green--Red 38 23 16b Blue--Yellow 58 43 24b Brown--Violet
Table 9-1 MDF 16DA/24DA Cabling
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch09.fm
Connecting the Signal or Alarm Cables to the MDF, I.M.
9.5 Connecting the Signal or Alarm Cables to the MDF, I.M.

To connect the signal or alarm cable to the CCDAX backplane (connector X53, ASW) and to
the main distribution frame on splitting strip D1 (only on MDF1) refer to Table 9-2. For D1 split-
ting strip, see Figure 9-1 on page 9-2).
Signals Connect Cable Connect Signals

ASW/ Pin Pin ASW
ASR
Module
CC80XW Mod. Cable Wire Cable Color Module/ CC80F
CC80 pin Wiring Cable CC40F
CCDAX Pin CCDAX
--- 1 20 1a White--Blue D5 ALUM1
--- 23 38 1b Blue--White E6 ALUM2
--- 3 18 2a White--Orange A4 NAL1
--- 4 17 2b Orange--White B5 NAL2
--- 5 16 3a White--Green A6 UAL1
--- 6 15 3b Green--White B7 UAL2
--- 7 14 4a White--Brown A2 0V
--- 8 13 4b Brown--White B3 0V
: : : : :: ---
ALUM1 26 35 12a Black--Orange ---
ALUM2 27 34 12b Orange--Black ---
NAL1 29 32 13a Black--Green ---
NAL2 30 31 13b Green--Black ---
UAL1 31 30 14a Black--Brown ---
UAL2 32 29 14b Brown--Black ---
Table 9-2 Pin Assignment for Signals or Alarms
ALUM (1/2) = Exchange line
NAL (1/2) = Minor alarm
UAL (1/2) = Major alarm
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch09.fm
Subscriber Line or Trunk Module Connection
9.6 Subscriber Line or Trunk Module Connection
Cable wiring on module

41
1 21 01
2 1a
3
4
5
X1 6
17a 1b 2a
7
8 17b 11a 2b
9
10 18a 11b 3a
1
2 18b 12a 3b
3
4 19a 12b 4a
5
X2 6
19b 4b
7
8 20a 13a 5a
9
10 20b 13b 5b
1
2 21a 14a 6a
3
4 21b 14b 6b 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 max.16x
5
X3 6
22a 7a 1 2 3 <--- Module slot---> 15 16 MDF cable
7
8 22b 15a 7b Wire 1 1
9
10 23a 15b 8a pair 24 DA
1
Front view
2 23b 8b 24DA 24 24
3
4 24a 16a 9a
5
X4 6
24b 16b 9b Module LTUW
7
8
9
10a S30804-B5367-X
10 10b
60 40 20
4 3 2 1 0
MDFHX (max. 24 DA)

16
1. -Wire pair- 8. 9. -Wire pair- 16. 17. -Wire pair- 24.
Splitting strip MDF

16 cable
1
1. -Wire pair- 8. 9. -Wire pair- 16. 17. -Wire pair- 24.
Splitting
strip 1
Figure 9-4 Subscriber Line or Trunk Module Connection
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch09.fm
9.6.1 Subscriber Line Module Part Numbers

Table 9-3 lists the subscriber line modules and corresponding part numbers.
Part No. Board

Remarks
S30810- Abbreviation
-Q6194-X SLCSM
-Q2117-X SLMS
-Q2153-X SLMQ
-Q2153-X100 SLMQ
-Q2141-X SLMA
-Q2157-X SLMA
-Q2191-X SLMA3
-Q2246-X SLMA
-Q2151-X300 SLC16
-Q2153-X SLMQ
-Q2153-X100 SLMQ
-Q2479-X SLMQ3
-Q2160-X STMA OWG-multimode
-Q2160-X100 STMA OWG-singlemode
-Q2163-X STMD2
-Q2163-X100 STMD2
-Q2168-X SLMO2
-Q2174-X STMD
-Q2177-X STHC
-Q2184-X SLMAB
-Q2169-X100 SLMOP
-Q2480-X SLMAR
-Q2168-X SLMO2
-Q2809-X SLMT
-Q2809-X100 SLMT
-Q2816-X SLMY
-Q2169-X STHC
-Q2303-X STMI
-Q2815-X STMVI
Table 9-3 Subscriber Line Modules and Part Numbers
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002
montbuch09.fm
9.6.1.1 Connecting the Subscriber Line Modules

Table 9-4 lists the line connections for the subscriber line modules.
..... Subscriber Circuits .....

ID/ HW Dial Mode Range Type of Operation Per a/b
Part No. ID Pro Damping Remarks mo Pe
S30810- DT ISD d. circu
MF DP p N
Dig. it
MDF cable a/b no., circuit no. per module, wire identification per circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
SLC16 1 km LT - digital UPN 16 1
-Q2151-X 806XH X for local feed; 4 x B (32 kbit/s)
- 801XH X dependent on cable + D (16 kbit/s)
X300 type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
SLMA 2 x 750 Ohm TS - analog Dual SICOFI 16 1
-Q2141-X 001XH X X 0 dB – 0.3 dB
7 dB – 0.3 dB for DP and DTMF terminals
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
SLMA 2 x 750 Ohm TS - analog Dual SICOFI 16 1
-Q2157-X 005XH X X 3 dB – 0.3 dB
- 9 dB – 0.3 dB for DP and DTMF terminals
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
SLMAR 2 x 600 Ohm TS - analog Quad- SICOFI 8 1
-Q2480-X EB0XH X X 3 dB – 0.3 dB
(FRG) for DP and DTMF terminals
-10 dB – 0.3 dB
(FRG)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b
Table 9-4 Subscriber Line Module Connections (Sheet 1 of 4)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch09.fm

S30810- DT DP p ISD d. circu
MF N
Dig. it
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
SLMA2 2 x 600 Ohm TS - analog Quad- SICOFI 24 1
-Q2246-X EC0XH X X 3 dB – 0.3 dB
(FRG) for DP and DTMF terminals
-10 dB – 0.3 dB
(FRG)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
SLMOP 1 km TS - digital UP0/E 24 1
-Q2180-X 009XH X X For local feed; 2 x B (64 kbit/s)
dependent on cable + D (16 kbit/s)
resistance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
SLMO2 1 km TS - digital UP0/E 24 1
-Q2168-X 80FXH X X For local feed; 2 x B (64 kbit/s)
dependent on cable + D (16 kbit/s)
resistance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
SLMQ 5.5 ... 9 km TS - digital or 2B1Q-Uk0 16 1
-Q2133-X 078XH X For local feed; NT-PABX or 2 x B (64 kbit/s)
dependent on cable LT-+NT operation + D (16
resistance kbit/s)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
SLMQ 5,5 ... 9 km LT - digital or 2B1Q-Uk0 16 1
-Q2153-X 07AXH X X For local feed; LT-+NT operation
- 07CXH X X dependent on cable 2 x B (64 kbit/s) + D (64 kbit/
X100 resistance s)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002
montbuch09.fm

MF N
Dig. it
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
SLMS Point to point: TS - digital S0 8 2
-Q2117-X 079XH X 1000 m 2 x B (64 kbit/s)
Bus mode c: + D (16 kbit/s)
500 m R=receive, T=transmit
Bus mode d:
150 m
(c=concentrated,
d=distributed)
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a0 a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 a8 a9 a10 a11 a12 a13 a14 a15
b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 b10 b11 b12 b13 b14 b15
S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0
R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T
STMD 1000 m TS / AS - digital ISDN, S0 8 2
-Q2174-X 077XH X (to NT) 2 x B (64 kbit/s)
+ D (16 kbit/s)
R=receive, T=transmit
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
STHC 1000 m TS / AS - digital UP0/E 16 1
-Q2177-X 375XH X (extended bus 2 x B (64 kbit/s) S0 4 2
500 m + D (16 kbit/s)
short bus 150 m R=receive, T=transmit
in subscriber
mode)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a0 a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 a8 a9 a10 a11 a12 a13 a14 a15 a16 a17 a18 a19 a20 a21 a22 a23
b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 b10 b11 b12 b13 b14 b15 b16 b17 b18 b19 b20 b21 b22 b23
S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0
R T R T R T R T
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch09.fm

MF N
Dig. it
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
STMD2 1000 m TS / AS - digital ISDN, S0 8 2
-Q2163-X 075XH X (to NT) 2 x B (64 kbit/s)
- 074XH + D (16 kbit/s)
X100 R=receive, T=transmit
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch09.fm
9.6.2 Trunk Module Part Numbers

Table 9-5 lists the trunk module and corresponding part number.
Part Number Board Abbreviation Remarks

S30810-
-Q2012-X100 TMEM
-Q2064-X100 TMLR
-Q2066-X TMAU
-Q2092-X TMEMW
-Q2092-X100 TMEMW
-Q2092-X200 TMEMW
-Q2121-X TMBCT
-Q2121-X100 TMBCT
-Q2123-X TMLBL
-Q2123-X100 TMLBL
-Q2138-X TMBLN
-Q2147-X TMSFP
-Q2147-X300 TMSFP
-Q2147-X400 TMSFP
-Q2159-X100 TM2LP
-Q2159-X110 TM2LP
-Q2159-X120 TM2LP
-Q2159-X130 TM2LP
-Q2159-X140 TM2LP
-Q2159-X150 TM2LP
-Q2159-X160 TM2LP
-Q2159-X170 TM2LP
-Q2159-X180 TM2LP
-Q2452-X TMDID
-Q2192-X TMDNH
-Q2186-X100 TMLRB
-Q2286-X TMLRB
-Q2214-X100 TMOM2
-Q2288-X TMCOW
Table 9-5 Trunk Module and Part Numbers (Sheet 1 of 2)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch09.fm
Part Number Board Abbreviation Remarks

S30810-
-Q2288-X10 TMCOW
-Q2288-X20 TMCOW
-Q2288-X40 TMCOW
-Q2288-X50 TMCOW
-Q2288-X60 TMCOW
-Q2288-X100 TMCOW
-Q2288-X120 TMCOW
-Q2288-X130 TMCOW
-Q2288-X310 TMCOW
-Q2292-X100 TMEW2
-Q2476-X TM3WO
-Q2477-X TM3WI
-Q2469-X TMEMUS
-Q24685-X TMC16
Table 9-5 Trunk Module and Part Numbers (Sheet 2 of 2)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch09.fm
9.6.2.1 Connecting the Trunk Modules to the MDF

Table 9-6 lists the trunk module connections to the MDF.
..... Trunk Circuits .....

Part No. ID. DT DP DP 2.W Damping Remarks Mo Per
S30810- MF 1.6: 2:1 T lL = Long cable d. circu
or 1 kL = Short cable it
MF
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TMBCT WES-SIG Tie-line circuit - WES and 4 1
-Q2121-X 034XH 0.8 wire -->50 km tie-line circuit - local battery
0.6 wire --> 35 km SICOFI
- 033XH 0.4 wire --> 20 km without signalling method
X100
Main PBX tie trunk/satellite
PBX tie trunk - WTK1SICOFI
with signalling method.
1 - 2 - 3 - 4 -
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a
b b b b
TMEM 2 x 1000 Ohm Tie-line circuit with E&M, CF 4 3
-Q2012- 021XH X - 3.5 / - 3.5 dBr code and
X100 WTK1
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 - - - -
------ --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
ka ka ka ka ga ga ga ga E E E E
kb kb kb kb gb gb gb gb M M M M
Table 9-6 Connection to MDF (Sheet 1 of 4)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch09.fm

MF
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TMEMW 2 x 1000 Ohm Tie-line circuit with E&M and 4 4
-Q2092-X 026XH MF X X X CF code
-X100 027XH V SICOFI
-X200 026XH With strap option
Assignment:
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 -
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---------------
AE AE AE AE AM AM AM AM E E E E MA MA MA MA <--
BE BE BE BE BM BM BM BM M M M M MB MB MB MB Standard
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---------------
T T T T T1 T1 T1 T1 E E E E - - - - <--
R R R R R1 R1 R1 R1 M M M M - - - - Type I
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---------------
Fan Fan Fan Fan Fab Fab Fab Fab - - - - - - - - <--
A A A A A A A A San SanSanSan - - - - Type Ia
B B B B B B B B Sab SabSabSab - - - - -
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---------------
T T T T T1 T1 T1 T1 E E E E M M M M <--
R R R R R1 R1 R1 R1 SG SG SG SG SB SB SB SB Type II
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch09.fm

MF
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TMEW2 2 x 1000 Ohm Tie-line circuit with E&M and 4 4
-Q2292- 029XH MF X X X CF code
X100 V SICOFI
With strap option
Assignment:
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 -
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---------------
AE AE AE AE AM AM AM AM E E E E MA MA MA MA <--
BE BE BE BE BM BM BM BM M M M M MB MB MB MB Standard
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---------------
T T T T T1 T1 T1 T1 E E E E - - - - <--
R R R R R1 R1 R1 R1 M M M M - - - - Type I
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---------------
Fan Fan Fan Fan Fab Fab Fab Fab - - - - - - - - <--
A A A A A A A A SanSan SanSan - - - - Type Ia
B B B B B B B B SabSab SabSab - - - - -
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---------------
T T T T T1 T1 T1 T1 E E E E M M M M <--
R R R R R1 R1 R1 R1 SG SG SG SG SB SB SB SB Type II
TMLBL 2 x 9 KOhm Local battery bi-directional 8 1
-Q2123-X 43AXH MF -7 / -0 dB COFI
V lL: -0 / -7 dB No direct inward dialing
kL: -5 / -2 dB (DID)
- 436XH -7 / -0 dB
X100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b
TMLR 2 x 1000 Ohm Tie-line circuit - direct 2 1
-Q2064- 0A5XH MF X depending on current loop
X100 V remote system; Bi-directional SICOFI
1 - 2 -
--- --- --- ---
a a
b b
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch09.fm

MF
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TMOM2 a / b > 17 mA APSE QUAD-SICOFI 4 3
-Q2214- 051XH MF X max. 2 x 500 /1000 (adapter for special
V Ohm equipment)
X100 (depending on Paging equipment, dictation
partner) equipment, TERM, ELA,
c-wire max. NWS, announcement
200Ohm equipment, QU, and
(with 3-wire outgoing loop monitoring
connection)
-0 / -7dBr
1 3 2 4 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a J D J D J D J D
b b b b P C P C P C P C
TMSFP -4,0 / -4,0 dBr Tie-line circuit with DTMF 8 2
-Q2147-X 43BXH MF X X -3,5 / -3,5 dBr signaling Dual SICOFI 4Dr
- 43EXH V *) *) : 2600 Hz
x300 43FXH -6,0 / -1,0 dBr 1200 / 1600 Hz
- -7,0 / -0,0 dBr 2100 Hz
x400 600 / 750 Hz *) DTMF signaling
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
Fan Fab Fan Fab Fan Fab Fan Fab Fan Fab Fan Fab Fan Fab Fan Fab
AE AM AE AM AE AM AE AM AE AM AE AM AE AM AE AM
BE BM BE BM BE BM BE BM BE BM BE BM BE BM BE BM
0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch09.fm
9.6.2.2 Connection to MDF with DID

Table 9-7 lists the trunk connections to the MDF with DID.
..... Trunk circuits .....

Ident. / HW Dial mode DID Range Type of operation Per a/b
part no. ident. DT DP DP 2.W Damping Remarks mo per
MF
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TMLRB DP, 2 x 1000 Ohm Trunk circuit with DID 8 1.5
-Q2286-X 460XH DTMF, lL: -8 / +2 dBr SICOFI
MFC kL: -5 / -1 dBr incoming/outgoing
R2; lL: -7.9 / -2.9 feed in CPBX
Socotel dBr
kL: -4.9 / -5.9
dBr
-5 / -2 dBr
1 3 5 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 4 6 8 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a bl bl bl bl
b b b b b b b b bl bl bl bl
TMLSR MF 2 x 1500 Ohm Trunk circuit with DID 4 1
-Q2477-X EEFXH V - 3.5/ -1 dBr SICOFI
MF X X incoming
C Loop code and
sig rering evaluation
n
1 2 3 4
--- --- --- ---
a a a a
b b b b
b1 b1 b1 b1
TM3WO DT 2 x 1500 Ohm Trunk circuit 4 2
-Q2476-X EEEXH MF X X -3.5 / -6 dBr QUAD-SICOFI 3Dr
MF Outgoing
C Local exchange
sign
1 - 1 - 2 - 2 - 3 - 3 - 4 - 4 -
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a c a c a c a c
b b b b
Table 9-7 Connection to MDF with DlD
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch09.fm
9.6.2.3 Connecting to the MDF with CDR and DID

Ident./ HW Dial mode for CDR DID Range Type of oper. Per a/b
part no. ident. AMT Damping Remarks mo per
S30810- DT DP DP 2.W 50 12 16 Sil lL = Long d. circu
MF 1.6: 2:1 T Hz kHz kHz Rev cable it
or 1 kL = Short
MF cable
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TMAU UEFS 2x500 Ohm Trunk circuit 3 3
-Q2066-X 0A2XH X X X WS48 -6 /-1 dB COFI
BFA with DID
Universal
TMAU UEFS 2x500 Ohm Trunk circuit 3 3
-Q2066-X 0A2XH X X X WS48 -6 /-1 dB COFI
BFA with DID
Universal
TMBLN ALS70 2 x 500 Trunk circuit 8 1
-Q2138-X 04AXH DT X X (DTMF) Ohm SICOFI
MF -7 / 0 dBr with/without
-6 / -1 dBr DID
-5 / -2 dBr Uni- or bi-
-4 / -3 dBr directional
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b
TM2LP AS QSICOFI 8 1
-Q2159- 480XH DID
X100 481XH DID
- 482XH X X X X X DID/
X110 483XH X X X X X X X DOD MSI
- 484XH X X X X X X X MSI
X120 485XH X X X X X X X MSI
- 486XH X X X X X X X MSI
X130 487XH X X X X X X MSI
-
X140
-
X150
-
X160
-
X170
X180
Table 9-8 Connection to the MDF with CDR and DID (Sheet 1 of 2)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002
montbuch09.fm

Ident./ HW Dial mode for CDR DID Range Type of oper. Per a/b
part no. ident. AMT Damping Remarks mo per
S30810- DT DP DP 2.W 50 12 16 Sil lL = Long d. circu
MF 1.6: 2:1 T Hz kHz kHz Rev cable it
or kL = Short
MF 1 cable
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1 3 5 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 4 6 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a bl bl bl bl
b b b b b b b b bl bl bl bl
Table 9-8 Connection to the MDF with CDR and DID (Sheet 2 of 2)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch09.fm
9.6.2.4 Connecting to the MDF with CDR but without DID

Table 9-9 lists the trunk connections to the MDF with CDR but without DID.

ID./ HW Dial Mode for CDR Range Type of Oper. Per a/b
Part No. ID AMT Damping Remarks mo Pper
S30810- DT DP DP 2.W 50 12 16 Sil lL = Long cable d. Circu
MF 1.6: 2:1 T Hz kHz kHz Rev kL = Short cable it
or 1
MF
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TMCOW 2x185-530Ohm DUAL-SICOFI 8 1
(J = 20 mA) Trunk circuit
-Q2288-X 450XH X X X X kL: -5 / -2 dB MSI
lL: -7 / 0 dB Without DID
-X10 451XH X X X X X lL: -6 / -1 dB Incoming and
-X20 452XH X X X X X kL: -4 / -3 dB outgoing
-X40 454XH X X X X ! -3 / -4 dB Loop start
! -4 / -3 dB Ground start
-X50 45CXH X X X X " -4,5 / -2,5 dB Loop monitoring
-X60 458XH X X X X -7 / 0 dB and pole
0 / -7 dB changing
--------------------------------------------------
- 459XH X X X X -5 / -2 dB -----------
X120 45AXH X X X X -7 / 0 dB ! = 4 different

- -5 / -2 dB " = 2 different
Impedance
X130 -6 / 0 dB (Austr) combinations
-9 / 3 dB (Austr)
457XH X X X X -5 / -2 dB (ITL)
-6 / -1 dB (ITL)
- -5.75/-lL: -8 / +2
45FXH X X X
X310
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b
TMLRB 1400 Ohm DUAL-SICOFI 8 1
-Q2186- 561XH X X -6 / -1 dBr Trunk circuit with
X100 DID
BPO loop signal.
Ground signal
recognition
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b
Table 9-9 Trunk Connection to the MDF with CDR but Without DID
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch09.fm
Connecting CMI Fuse Modules, I.M.
9.7 Connecting CMI Fuse Modules, I.M.

Figure 9-5 shows an example of a CMI fuse module connection and strapping.
Fuse module S30807-K6138-X1
Si10
Si11
Si12
Si13
Si14
Si15
Si16
Si2
Si3
Si4
Si5
Si8
Si9
Si1
Si6
Si7
Si1 Si16
0V -48V
SLC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
a
b
a/b fuse/0V a/b fuse/0V
1 16
Strap. con 35Da C39104-A7001-D351
Figure 9-5 CMI Fuse Module Connection and Jumpering Example
To connect the CMI fuse module, insert it in slot A1or A3 on the main distribution frame (see
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch09.fm
Creating a Strapping List, I.M.
9.8 Creating a Strapping List, I.M.

To create a list of all positions that are necessary in the MDF:
1. Use the tables in Section 9.8.1 on page 9-25 and Section 9.8.2 on page 9-26 as templates
to strapping the MDF.
You can also query the assignment of positions with the AMOs SBCSU and SCSU.
2. Include these lists with the customer documentation, These are the current working docu-
ments for activities performed on the MDF.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

HiPath 4500, V1.0, Installation Instructions
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002
9.8.1
MDF Pin (a / b) BGR
Slot Slot
1 / 3 / 5 / 7 / 9 / 11/ 13/ 15/ 17/ 19/ 21/ 23/ 25/ 27/ 29/ 31/ 33/ 35/ 37/ 39/ 41/ 43/ 45/ 47/ /P
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
C
016
System Assignment 16/24 DA Splitting Strip

C
015
C
014
C
013
C
012
C
011
C
010
C
009
C
008
C
007
C
006

C
005
C
004
C
003
C
montbuch09.fm
002
C
001
9-25
Da 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 a-b
montbuch09.fm
9.8.2 Network Assignment 25/35 DA Strapping Connector

1 / 3 / 5 / 7 / 9 / 11/ 13/ 15/ 17/ 19/ 21/ 23/ 25/ 27/ 29/ 31/ 33/ 35/ 37/ 39/ 41/ 43/ 45/ 47/ 49/ 51/ 53/ 55/ 57/ 59/ 61/ 63/ 65/ 67/ 69/
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70
Pin (a / b)
Slot - D 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Installing Peripheral Equipment
10 Installing Peripheral Equipment

10.1 Installing the AC4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.1.1 Verifying the Site Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.1.2 Installing the AC4 Handset Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10.1.3 Installing the AC Cables to the Controller Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10.1.4 Installing the AC4 Keyboard Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10.1.5 Cabling of the AC4 Attendant Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.1.6 Connecting the AC4 to the UAE6 Terminal Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
10.1.7 AC4 Ordering Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
10.1.8 AC4 Order Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.1.9 Connecting the AC4 to the UCON (World) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10.1.10 Powering On the AC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.2 Connecting the Internal Clock Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10.3 Connecting the MO Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
10.4 Connecting the Service Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
10.5 Connecting to Teleservice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
10.5.1 Connecting HiPath Teleservice By Means of SLMA/TM... Module . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
10.5.2 Connecting HiPath Teleservice By Means of a LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
10.6 Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
10.6.1 Connecting ATM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
10.6.1.1 Direct Networking of Two HiPath 4000 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
10.6.1.2 Networking Several HiPath 4000 Systems By Means of an ATM Switch. . 10-20
10.6.1.3 Laying the Fiber Optic Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
10.6.2 Connecting a Data Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
10.6.3 Connecting External Devices for Teleworking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
10.6.4 Connecting ISDN Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
10.6.4.1 PNE / PBXXX Back to Back with Modem and DIUN2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
10.6.4.2 PNE / PBXXX Back to Back with Modem and with DIUN2. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
10.6.4.3 PNE / PBXXX Back to Back in Single Card BOX with DIUN2 . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
10.6.4.4 PNE / PBXXX Back to Back with Modem in DIUS2 Emulation with DIUN2 10-28
10.6.4.5 CDG / PBXXX as Gateway, Fully Integrated Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
10.6.4.6 CDG / PBXXX with DIUN2 as Gateway, Partially Integrated Mode . . . . . . 10-29
10.6.5 Cordless Multicell Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
10.7 Installing the Breakout Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
10.8 Installing the Custom Callout Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
10.8.1 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
10.8.2 CCA II Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
10.8.3 CCA II LED Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
10.8.4 CCA II Cable Connection Table and Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
10.8.5 Installing the CCAII Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
10.8.6 Installing the CCAII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
10.8.7 Connecting the CCA II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
10.9 Installing the Distance Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
10.10 Installing and Configuring the HiPath ProCenter Server Message Stream. . . . . . 10-44
10.11 Installing the Music-on-Hold Interface Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
10.12 Installing the Optiset E Adapter Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Installing the AC4
10.1 Installing the AC4
Caution
7 The shielding of all front cables must be bonded at the shelf opening with two ca-
bles fasteners for every frame (with the exception of network cables and optical fibre
cables).
This section provides procedures for installing the AC4.
The AC4 is a device that is used by an attendant to set up external and internal calls. Figure 10-
1 shows the connectivity diagram of the AC4.
Required interface
UP0/E
AC-4
HiPath 4000
+/- 48V
SLMO
Approximate range 1 km
UP0/E U U2B1Q
AC-4 C
O Approximate range 8 km SLMQ
N
Figure 10-1 AC4 Connectivity Diagram
10.1.1 Verifying the Site Requirements

The following power requirements must be met before the AC4 is installed:
● The AC4 must be located within 4 m (12 ft.) of the nearest 120 Vac receptacle.
● The power receptacle for the AC4 must be 120 Vac at 50 or 60 hertz (Hz).
The wire gauge used varies according to the distance between the AC4 and the system.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Installing the AC4
Table 5-2 lists the MDF requirements for the AC4.
AWG Wire Size Board Type Distance

No. 22 and 24 AWG SLMO 1000 m (3000 ft.)
SLMQ 8000 m (26000 ft.)
Table 10-1 Wire Sizes and Distances from the AC4 to the System
10.1.2 Installing the AC4 Handset Cord

The AC4 handset is equipped with a 2 m (6 ft.) cord.
To install the AC4 handset cord:
1. Place the AC4 on the work station table.
2. Connect the attendant’s handset cord to the left jack of the AC4 keyboard (see Figure 10-
2 on page 10-5). Depending on the attendant’s preference, a headset can be used in place
of the handset.
The attendant’s handset and headset cannot be connected at the same time. A
> AC4 headset adapter is required with each headset. Follow local ordering proce-
dures to order the headset and headset adapter.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Installing the AC4
1
2
5 4
1 - Keyboard
2 - Handset and cradle
3 - Power supply
4 - Line cord
5 - Headset adapter
6 - Monitor
Figure 10-2 AC4 Components
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Installing the AC4
10.1.3 Installing the AC Cables to the Controller Assembly

To install the cords to the controller assembly:
1. Place the AC4 on the work station table.
2. Turn the AC4 to its side (see Figure 10-3 on page 10-6).
3. Plug the power supply cord into the power supply cord receptacle labeled 2.
4. Plug the other end of the power supply cord into the wall outlet.
5. Plug other devices to the corresponding jacks labeled in Figure 10-3 on page 10-6.
1 2 3 4
3
1 - Line cord
2 - Power supply
3 - Magnetic tape
4 - Maintenance terminal for the blind
Figure 10-3 AC4 Jacks (Back View)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Installing the AC4
10.1.4 Installing the AC4 Keyboard Template

To install the AC4 keyboard template (Figure 10-4):
1. Remove the adhesive backing from the back of the template.
2. Using the LEDs as guides, align the template.
3. Press down firmly around the template until it is properly positioned.
Figure 10-4 AC4 Keyboard Template
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Installing the AC4
10.1.5 Cabling of the AC4 Attendant Console
SWU Uv = 6 V Voltage on
MDF AC4:
Umin=36V
LTUW KAST
UP0/E
SLMO
The maximum number of AC4
consoles that can be
connected per SLMO is 6
Attendant console with Braille unit and magnetic tape (MT)
3: Display #)
8, 9: Open listening
hand-
set with adapter #, a)
1, 2: ACK4
keyboard #)
7: head Board: ACC4
set #)
4, 5, 6: Handset
with cradle and cable
#) 20:Terminal box #, c)
23: Adapter
cable #, d)
230V ~ 21: Cable a/b #)
48V=
22: Adapter 9 V~ 230V ~
31, 32: Power supply unit #) 24: Adapter cable #, d)
cable #) 10, 11: Plug-in power
40: Connecting
cord #) supply #, b)
30: BBLIS
braille terminal #) MT
Items 1 to 6, 10, 11 and 21 are supplied with the AC4
#) For serial numbers of devices and cables, refer to Table “AC4 Order Numbers”
a) Handset with open listening for training purposes only
b) Plug-in power supply 10, 11 for backlit display
c) AC4 connection by means of a terminal box, see Figure “AC4 by means of terminal box UAE6”
(optionally with UCON, see Figure “AC4 connection to UCON (WORLD)”)
d) Adapter cable 22, 23 to ensure compatibility with AC/AC2/AC3
Figure 10-5 AC4 Cabling Overview
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Installing the AC4
10.1.6 Connecting the AC4 to the UAE6 Terminal Box
Supply by means of T/R wires
HiPath 4000
AC4
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
a
b a/b reversible
System Cable 1 UAE 6
UAE 6 =Terminal box AP: C39334-Z7052-C23

Cable1 = Connecting cord (9 m): C39195-Z7205-A100
Figure 10-6 AC4 connection to the UAE6 Terminal Box
10.1.7 AC4 Ordering Packages

Figure 10-6 lists the ordering packages for the AC4.
Units Part Numbers

AC4 Canada/U.S.A S30807-H5478-X
AC4 China S30807-H5478-C
AC4 Telekom S30807-H5478-X1
AC4 Thailand S30807-H5478-D
AC4 UK S30807-H5478-B
AC4 WORLD S30807-H5478-X
Table 10-2 Order Packages
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Installing the AC4
10.1.8 AC4 Order Numbers

Table 10-3 lists the order numbers for the AC4 components.
Serial Name /Description Abbre- Order Number

No. viation
WORLD attendant console AC4 S30807-H5478-X
1 WORLD keyboard (pictograms) ACK4 S30807-S5478-X
2 UK keyboard (Eng. abbrev.) ACK4 S30807-S5478-B
3 Display housing (with display) C30807-D5478-X
4 Handset S30122-X7310-X
5 Handset cable C39363-A7007-C2
6 Handset receptacle C39363-A7007-C4
7 PLANTRONICS headset with cable S30122-K5320-X
8 Monitoring handset S30122-X7310-X
9 Monitoring handset adapter C39195-Z7206-A8
Plug-in power supply unit 120 Vac S30122-X7311-
X200
10 Plug-in power supply unit 230 VAC / 9 Vac (back- S30122-X7311-X
11 ground lighting)
Plug-in power supply unit 230 VAC / 9 Vac (UK) S30122-X7311-
(background lighting) X100
20 Terminal box in Putz type UAE 6 (a/b) C39334-Z7052-C23
21 AC4 cable --> terminal box, 9 m (a/b) C39195-Z7205-
22 TAPE OUT adapter cable A100
S30267-Z313-A2
23 V.24 adapter cable S30267-Z344-A2
24 BBLIS Power adapter cable C39195-Z7207-A2
30 BBLIS braille line (blind operator Braille unit) with BBLIS S30122-K5057-X
cable
31 Power supply unit 230 VAC / 48 VDC (for BBLIS) PSU 48 S30122-K5484-X3
WORLD
32 Power supply unit 230 VAC / 48 VDC (for BBLIS) PSU 48 S30122-K5484-X4
UK
40 Connection cord AC4 --> MB (8-pin) (MB accessories)
Table 10-3 AC4 Order Numbers
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Installing the AC4
10.1.9 Connecting the AC4 to the UCON (World)
SWU
MDF
LTUW KAST
1
SLMQ
(U2B1Q)
(U2B1Q)
5 B
UP0/E D
AC4
A
(U2B1Q) max.100m
3 3 Using the UCON (optiset E distance
adapter), the AC4 connection can be up to
8000 meters long (U2B1Qlink) depending on
UCON M the type of cable used.
(UCON S) C
8 230V~
PSU
9
7
230V~
PSP
6
1 = MDF cable 16x2x0.4 A=A=
Universal
Universal connecting unit
connecting unit
UAE
UAE8/88/8AP:
AP:L30460-X
L30460-X 951-X,
951-X,
3 = UCON S / M: 1 connecting cord (6-wire, 6 m) is UP:
UP: -X-X952-X,
952-X,
supplied, additional ones have to be ordered: V30146- AP/UP:
AP/UP: -X-X 958-X
958-X
A6012-D3 (6 m)
5 =AC4 connecting cord (6-wire): C39195-Z7205-A100 (9 m) B=B=Attendant console AC4
Attendant console AC4
S30807-H5478-X
S30807-H5478-X
6 =UCON S plug-in power supply models: C=C=UCON
UCONMM adapter
adapter(optiset EE
(optiset distance
distance
PSP1, Europe S30122-K5061-X-2 (CE) adapter Multi):
adapter S30807-U5467-X
Multi): S30807-U5467-Xor or
PSP2, United Kingdom S30122-K5062-X-1 UCON SS adapter (optiset EEdistance
PSP3, China S30122-K5063-X-1 UCON adapter (optiset distance
adapter Single)
adapter Single)S30807-U5467-X100
S30807-U5467-X100
7 =UCON M power supply unit: PSUS30122-K5484-X
(comes with PSU connecting cables and D=D=Terminal box
Terminal UAE
box 6 6APAP
UAE
PSU power cable with grounding plug) C39195-Z7052-C23
C39195-Z7052-C23
8 =PSU connecting cable C39195-A7001-A45 (3 m)
9 =PSU power cable C39195-A7001-C11 (Schuko)
C39195-A7001-C32 (UK)
Figure 10-7 AC4 Connection to UCON (World)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Installing the AC4
10.1.10 Powering On the AC4

To power on the AC4:
1. Attach the AC4 power cord to the AC4 power supply.
2. Plug the other end of the AC4 power cord to a 120-Vac outlet.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Connecting the Internal Clock Box
10.2 Connecting the Internal Clock Box
Front
CABCCD
SLOT 085 118

MTSCG MTSCG
CCDAX
2) Clock output
Top view of the 1) Clock cable 90 cm “T4“/2,048 MHz/120W
socket under the after G.703/10
CDAX
AECB
1) = Clock cable Sub-D, 25pol. 90 cm S30267-Z304-A9-4

2) = Clock output “T4“, Sub-D 9pol. S30267-Z7-A...
“T4” is only output by the clock if pins 5/9 are bridged in the Sub-D
plug, (replaces the adaptor function APT3/S30807-K5407-X).
AECB S30807-U6139-X
MTSCG S30810-Q2224-X V1.0
MTSCG S30810-Q2224-X1 >V1.0
CCDAX S30804-B5384-X
Note: To install the AECB, insert it into the socket under the CCDAX frame at the rear
using the plugged in cables. The clock cables are directed through openings to the
CCDAX. The cables must be stripped and make contact with the housing.
Use of the AECB is only recommended for Duplex operation.
The AECB must run for 2 hours before initial operation.
To ensure smooth functioning of the AECB, the HW identification can be checked:
HW identification of the MTSCG (-X/-X1) C04XH/C14XH
HW identification of the MTSCG (-X/-X1) with AECBC05XH/C15XH
The clock cable S30267-Z304-A9 (90 cm) must not be extended (speak over).
Figure 10-8 Internal Clock Box AICB Connection
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Connecting the MO Box
10.3 Connecting the MO Box
MO BOX
Base cabinet SCSI cable Portable

(CCDAX shelf)
220 V~
Power cable
Front view
DM...modules
MO BOX
SCSI cable Stationary
220 V~
Power cable
Base cabinet
(CCDAX shelf) Back view External SCSI box for stationary
and portable use (ESBOX
Slot 121 Slot 109 Slot 88 Slot 76 S30124-H5085-X). Contains:
1 1 1 1 MO BOX 1,3GB (magnetic
optical disk)
2 2 2 2 S30122-X7458-X
DB50 mini connector with
3 3 3 3
V24/2
SCSI cable (C39195-Z7603-A8/

SCSI A20)
4 0V4 4 4
NGA
0V Power cable
PF
5 5 5 5 C39195-Z7001-C11 (2-pin)
-48 V
-48
V24/3
C39195-Z7001-C12 (USA/CDA)
6 6 6 6
C39195-Z7001-C32 (GBR)
ALIN 7 7 7 7 Remove:
SCSI terminating resistors on the backplane,
8 8 8 8
V24/4
terminator in MO box
9 9 9 9
LTUS 1B LTUS 2B LTUS 1A LTUS 2A
Figure 10-9 MO Box Connection
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Connecting the Service Terminal
10.4 Connecting the Service Terminal
V.24 Ports V.24 cable ranges:

in the shelves: 10 m bei 19200 baud
CC80F S30804-B5391-X 20 m bei 9600 baud
CCDAX S30804-B5384-X 30 m bei 4800 baud
90 m bei 2400 baud
f. US f. Ger/IM
DP.. DP..
DSC. DSC.
1) Dongle is connected directly to ...
the DP; (software protectionn)
1) A = Kabel, S30257-Z7752-A...
B = Kabel, S30267-Z314-A...
Dongle C = Kabel, S30267-Z357-A7
D = Kabel, S30267-A7269-B615
D
Dongle
C
A/B BTT
or
B 230V~ 230V~
or
B
230V~
A
B
Modem Modem
230V~ 230V~
Figure 10-10 Service Terminal Connection
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Connecting to Teleservice
10.5 Connecting to Teleservice
10.5.1 Connecting HiPath Teleservice By Means of SLMA/TM... Module
DP.. V.24 ports

DP..
DSC. in the shelves:
DSC.
CCDAX S30804-B5384-X
CC80F S30804-B5391-X
Dongle
Cable
S30267-Z357-A7
* Modem = e.g. 2425M DX or

CPV Delta Supra /
CPV Pico TLR
TAE6D/
UAE 8/8
a/b MDF
MODEM *
+AWD
Cable
S30257-Z7752-A...
230V~
a/b a/b
SLMA
a/b
TM..
Trunk line
a/b
Service centre MODEM
(FBT) +AWD OVST
2425M DX
230V~
Figure 10-11 HiPath-Teleservice Connection By Means of the SLMA/TM.. Module
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
10.5.2 Connecting HiPath Teleservice By Means of a LAN

The LAN represents another option for connecting to Teleservice or external devices. For this
purpose, you need the WAML module. This connects the internal LAN with the external LAN.
It can be installed in any slot (base or expansion cabinet). Refer to tFigure 10-12 on page 10-18.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
WAML module
LTU...
WAML module T 10BT
LTU... Front connector 10B2

10BT
10BT
BNC o.
10B2 R AUI
RJ45 o.
10BT
SUB-D
AUI
1) TP cable 2m
3) LAN cable
2) TP cable 5m
(optional)
Slot 040 o.
052
HUBC
CCDAX
K
Front
External
4) LAN cable device
1) Twisted pair cable 2m 10BT(RJ45) C39195-Z7201-A20

2) Twisted pair cable 5m 10BT(RJ45) C39195-Z7201-A50
3) LAN cable:
- Coax cable 10B2, 2m, including C39195-Z7101-A20
R = BNC-connector 50 Ohm C39334-Z7061-C6
T = BNC T-piece C39334-Z7061-C5
K = Coupling (BNC) C39195-A7001-B140
- or twisted pair cable 10BT(RJ45),3m C39195-Z7202-A30
- or TAP cable AUI (15-pin Sub-D), 3m S30267-Z308-A(30DM)
Coupling not necessary, as cable pin<--> jack
4) LAN cable 12m for external device (optional):
- Coax cable 10B2, including C39195-Z7101-A120
R = BNC connector 50 Ohm C39334-Z7061-C6
- or Twisted pair cable 10BT(RJ45) C39195-Z7201-A120
- or TAP cable AUI (15pol D-Sub) S30267-Z308-A(120DM)
All cables leading from the cabinet must be insulated and connected with the housing!
Figure 10-12 Connection of External Devices By Means of the SLMPX/WAML2 Board
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Connecting Cables
10.6 Connecting Cables
10.6.1 Connecting ATM

For asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) connection, a fiber-optic cable is attached to the STMA
board. There are two networking options:
● Direct networking of two HiPath 4000 systems
● Networking several HiPath 4000 systems by means of an ATM switch
10.6.1.1 Direct Networking of Two HiPath 4000 Systems

Figure 10-13 shows a connectivity diagram of two HiPath systems that are directly networked.
~ 2000 m multimode fiber optic cable

HiPath 4000 ~ 25000 m single-mode fiber optic cable HiPath 4000
4 * S2-
interface 1 * 155 MBit/s
opt. interface
STMA STMA
Figure 10-13 Direct Networking of Two HiPath 4000 Systems
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Connecting Cables
10.6.1.2 Networking Several HiPath 4000 Systems By Means of an ATM Switch

Figure 10-13 shows a diagram of five HiPath 4000 systems that are networked using an ATM
switch.
HiPath 4000 HiPath 4000 HiPath 4000

STMA
STMA
STMA
HiPath HiPath
4000 4000
STMA STMA
5 Fiber optic cables
ATM Switch 10 Virtual connections
Networking Five HiPath 4000 Systems By Means of an ATM Switch
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Connecting Cables
10.6.1.3 Laying the Fiber Optic Cable

To lay the fiber optic cable so that it is protected against damage, proceed with care as follows:
1. Pull the fiber-optic cable out from the back
of the system as shown in the Figure, and
connect it to the STMA board.
2. Take a rubber grommet and cut it to the ap-

propriate length. Then place this grommet
around the fiber optic cable.
3. Secure the cable to the system frame using

a tie wrap.
Figure 10-14 Connecting the Fiber Optic Cable
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Connecting Cables
10.6.2 Connecting a Data Channel
DP.. DP.. V.24 ports

DSC. DSC. in the shelves:
CCDAXS30804-B5384-X
CC80F S30804-B5391-X/A
Dongle
*1 = Modem without AWD
*2 = Modem with AWD
Cable
S30267-Z357-A7
MDF
*1 a/b
Cable TAE6D/
S30257-Z7752-A... UAE 8/8
a/b
MODEM *
+AWD *2
230V~
a/b a/b
SLMA
a/b
TM..
Trunk line
a/b
MODEM * OVST
DVA +AWD
230V~
* Modem = e.g. DNG 19K2-13

a/b
MODEM *
DVA +AWD
230V~
Figure 10-15 Data Channel Connection
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Connecting Cables
10.6.3 Connecting External Devices for Teleworking
Front side Front side
SLMPX/WAML2 SLMPX/WAML2 T
T
LTU.. LTU..
10BT T 3) BNC 10BT
4) BNC
50cm 2/5m 10B2 BNC
10B2 R
RJ45 10BT RJ45
10BT
AUI AUI
SUB-D RJ45 SUB-D

CCDAX
1) LAN cable
1) LAN cable SUB-D
F Filter
Coupling 2) LAN cable
TRX /
FanOut Box
Server
External HUB
T R
1) LAN cable
- Twisted pair cable 3m 10BT(RJ45) C39195-Z7202-A30
- or coaxial cable 10B2, 2m, with C39195-Z7101-A20
R = BNC termination 50 Ohm C39334-Z7061-C6
T = BNC T-part C39334-Z7061-C5
F = Filter C39334-xxxx
- or TAP cable AUI (15pol Sub-D), 3m S30267-Z308-A(30DM)
2) LAN cable 12m for external units:
- coaxial cable 10B2, with C39195-Z7101-A120
R = BNC termination 50 Ohm C39334-Z7061-C6
3) Coaxial cable 10B2, 50cm C39195-Z7101-A5
4) Coaxial cable 10B2, 2/5m C39195-Z7101-A20/50
WAML module S30810-Q2205-X
LTUW module frame S30804-B5367-X / S30804-B5385-X
All cables leading from the cabinet must be insulated and connected with the housing.
Figure 10-16 Connecting External Units for Teleworking
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Connecting Cables
10.6.4 Connecting ISDN Mail
Caution
7 The shield of all front cables (except network cables and optical fiber cables) must
be secured to the frame with two cable ties at the shelf opening.
Bild 10-17 shows the fastening of the cable shield with two cable ties.
Figure 10-17 Securing the cable shield
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Connecting Cables
10.6.4.1 PNE / PBXXX Back to Back with Modem and DIUN2
HiPath 2 The PNE / PBXXX module connects remote

LTUW HiPath systems by means of the mail network
X2
and allows all HiPath features to be used.
Adapter
1 2X15-pin
DIUS2 APPCU
X3
3 2 6
X2 S2
Port D Adapter
15-pin APPCU 2X15-pin
PNE
Port C X3
Port B PBXXX
Port A
# Port M MDF
11
15-pin port 0 NT/ mail network -
DIUN2 ISDN
Port 1
8
15-pin
Mail network -
IDN
7
5 2 wi.
10 9
25-pin
Signalling
(max. 4 modems) Modem
220V~
1 = S2 DIUS2 digit. interf. unit: S30810-Q2096-X
# = Maintenance port M, V.24,
2 = APPCU adapter: S30807-K5415-X
3 = PNE private network emulator: S30810-Q6400-X or 15-pin cannon connector
Peripheral board PBXXX: S30810-Q6401-X
5 = Modem e.g. CPV, V.32bis: S30122-X5621-X
6 = S2 cable, 2X15-pin cannon conn.: S30267-Z88-A10
7 = V.24 cable, 15/25-pin cannon conn.,10m: C39195-Z7267-C2
8 = S2 cable, 15-pin cannon conn., open end: S30267-Z167-A..
9 = S-Y(St)Y 16x2x0.4 cable
10 = UAE 8/8 AP: L30460-X 951-X,
UP: L30460-X 952-X,
AP/UP: L30460-X 958-X
TAE6D: C39334-Z7052-C11
11 = DIUN2 (dig.interf. unit Nx64KBit/s): S30810-Q2196-X
Figure 10-18 PNE / PBXXX Back-to-Back with Modem and DIUN2
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Connecting Cables
10.6.4.2 PNE / PBXXX Back to Back with Modem and with DIUN2
The PNE / PBXXX module connects remote HiPath systems by

means of the mail network and allows all HiPath features to be
used.
HiPath
2
LTUW
X2
Adapter
1 2X15-pin
DIUS2 APPCU
X3
3 2 6
X2 S2
Port D Adapter
APPCU 2X15-pin
PNE
Port C X3
Port B PBXXX
Port A
# Port M MDF
11
15-pin port 0 NT/mail network-
ISDN
DIUN2
Port 1
8
15-pin
# = Maintenance port M, V.24, 15-pin cannon conn.

3 = PNE private network emulator: S30810-Q6400-X or
PBXXX peripheral board: S30810-Q6401-X
6 = S2 cable, 2X15-pin cannon connector: S30267-Z88-A10
Figure 10-19 PNE / PBXXX Back to Back without Modem and with DIUN2
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Connecting Cables
10.6.4.3 PNE / PBXXX Back to Back in Single Card BOX with DIUN2
HiPath Single Card BOX 11

LTUW 1 2 MDF
X2 8 X3 Port M #)
Adapter
APPCU CPAPX PNE / Port D
DIUS2 2X15-pin S2 8 15-pin PBXXX 15-pin
X3 Port C
X6 Port B
Re.ar
13 8 Port A
Port 0 12
3
2X15-pin 8 S2
DIUN2
Port 1 NT/ mail netw.-ISDN
Front
25-pin
Modem
10 9 Mail net.-IDN
5 220V~
7 PSU
-48V =
0.5 A
Signalling (max.4 modems)
#) = Maintenance port M, V.24, 15-pin cannon conn.

7 = V.24 cable, 15/25-pin cannon conn.,10m: C39195-Z7267-C2
9 = S-Y(St)Y 16x2x0.4 cable
10 = UAE 8/8 AP: L30460-X 951-X,
UP: L30460-X 952-X,
AP/UP: L30460-X 958-X
TAE6D: C39334-Z7052-C11
11 = Single card BOX for PNE: S30805-U5265-X
12 = DC - DC converter CPAPX: S30807-Q5401-X100
Figure 10-20 PNE / PBXXX Back to Back in Single Card Box with DIUN2
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Connecting Cables
10.6.4.4 PNE / PBXXX Back to Back with Modem in DIUS2 Emulation with DIUN2
HiPath
LTUW The PNE / PBXXX module connects remote HiPath systems by means
of the mail network and allows all HiPath features to be used.
3
Port D
15-pin
Port C
PNE /
Port B PBXXX
Port A MDF
# Port M NT/ mail network-ISDN

Port 0
2X15-pin DIUN2 8
Port 1
1
mail network - IDN
5 10 9 2 wi.
7 25-pin
Signalling Modem
(max. 4 modems)
220V~
# = Maintenance port M, V.24, 15-pin cannon conn.
1 = DIUN2 (dig.interf. unitNx64KBit/s): S30810-Q2196-X

7 = V.24 cable, 15/25-pin cannon conn.,10m:C39195-Z7267-C2
8 = S2 cable, 15-pin cannon conn., open end:S30267-Z167-A..
9 = S-Y(St)Y 16x2x0,4 cable
10 = UAE 8/8 AP: L30460-X 951-X,
UP: L30460-X 952-X,
AP/UP: L30460-X 958-X
TAE6D: C39334-Z7052-C11
Figure 10-21 PNE / PBXXX Back to Back with Modem in DIUS2 Emulation with DIUN2
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Connecting Cables
10.6.4.5 CDG / PBXXX as Gateway, Fully Integrated Mode
LTUW HiPath
MDF
3 2 NT/ mail net.-ISDN

X2
Adapter
CDG /
APPCU 2X15-pin S2
8
PBXXX APQC X3
Fully integrated mode is used as of Hicom E V3.0
2 = APPCU adapter: S30807-K5415-X or

APQC adapter: S30807-K6124-X
3 = CorNet DPNSS gateway CDG: S30810-Q2218-X or
Figure 10-22 CDG / PBXXX as Gateway, Fully Integrated Mode
10.6.4.6 CDG / PBXXX with DIUN2 as Gateway, Partially Integrated Mode
HiPath MDF
2 NT/ mail network-
LTUW
X2 S2 ISDN
8
Adapter
3 CDG 2X15-pin
PBXXX APPCU
X3
1
6
Port 0
2X15-pin DIUN2 Partially integrated mode is used for <
Hicom 300 E V3.0
Port 1
S2
3 = CorNet DPNSS Gateway CDG: S30810-Q2218-X or
6 = S2 cable, 2X15-pin cannon conn..: S30267-Z88-A10
Figure 10-23 CDG / PBXXX with DIUN2 as Gateway, Partially Integrated Mode
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Connecting Cables
10.6.5 Cordless Multicell Integration
The Cordless Multicell Integration (CMI) is not released in Canada and U.S.
>
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Connecting Cables
SWU 220V~
PSP
MDF
LTU..,CC80.. A Refer to next 2
L80X KAST UP0/E page for details
1
SLC16
(U2B1Q) BS 2
4 3
‡33V=
200 mA
EPSU B
-56V= Line damping for UP0/E: max.14.5 dB with 192 kHz
5 U2B1Q: max.8000 m DECT
UP0/E interface: If the radio zones of two base stations overlap, radio channel
then the difference in the cable lengths of the associated base
stations must be restricted to 500 m (transfer time for han-
dover process).
U2B1Q interface: The transfer time is automatically corrected
An SLC16 uses up to 64 ports on the backplane.
The CMI application is always restricted to one shelf, i.e. all
SLCs are inserted either in the base cabinet or in the Max. 8 simultaneous calls
expansion shelf. with 2 x UP0/E on base station S30807-
A= Universal connecting unit H5471-X200.
UAE 8/8 AP: L30460-X 951-X,
UP: -X 952-X, or max. 12 simultaneous calls with 3 x
AP/UP: -X 958-X UP0/E on base station S30807-H5471-
B= Base station for CMI, Version 2.1, (UP0/E) X.
S30807-H5471-X / -X200 or or max. 8 simultaneous calls with 2 x
base station for CMI, Version 2.2, (U2B1Q)
S30807-H5473-X U2B1Q on base station S30807-H5473-
X.
C= Standard mobile phone (SMT)
S30852-H911-B101/-B104 (anthracite/white) or but 127 mobile phones per SLC16
C
enhanced mobile phone (KMT) supported.
S30852-H910-B501/-B504 (anthracite/white)
each with charging unit:
S30852-S910-B211/-B214 (anthracite/white)
1 = MDF cable 16x2x0.4
UP0/E interface: The UP0/E interfaces of a base station must be
connected with one SLC16 / S30810-Q2151-X.
2 = Plug-in power supply for local power feed
PSP1: S30122-K5061-X-2
3 = Edge connector, 8-pin C39334-Z7089-C13 (contained in BS2)
4 = Terminal block (for local power feed only)
5 = External power supply unit (EPSU). Required if only one port is used by BS2
and the length of the line to the Hicom system is ‡ 100 m.
Figure 10-24 Cordless Multicell Integration, I.M.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Connecting Cables
10.6.5.1 CMI (V2.1/UP0/E) Network Local Supply Connections
UAE 8/8
+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PSP1 plug-in power supply
230V~
48V=
-
Edge CMI base station

connector
Terminal block Connector X1
6 7 8 Free
8
b3, port 2 or -
4 5 6 7
a3, port 2 or +
-
4 5
b2, port 1
a2, port 1
2 3
b1, port 0
2 3
+
a1, port 0
max 3x UP0/E
1
Free
1
CMI V2.1
From Hicom system
The local power feed should be used if:

only one port is in use, and the length of the line to the Hicom
system is ‡ 100 m.
The power supply of a base station must be protected by approx. 300 mA (15W)
(fire protection).
If several base stations are supplied by means of a power supply, then every base station
must be individually protected with approx. 200 mA (10W).
PSP1 = Plug-in power supply S30122-K5061-X for local power feed

UAE 8/8 = Universal connection unit
AP: L30460-X 951-X,
UP: -X 952-X,
AP/UP: -X 958-X
CMI = CMI base station S30807-H5471-X/-X100/-X200 (UP0/E)
Edge conn. = Edge connector C39334-Z7089-C13 is supplied
Figure 10-25 CMI Network Local Supply Conditions
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Installing the Breakout Box
10.7 Installing the Breakout Box

The cable supplied with the breakout box is 1 meter (3 ft.) long. If the breakout box is installed
more that 1 meter (3 ft.) from the HiPath 4000, an additional standard 25-pair extension cable
with Amphenol connectors can be installed between the breakout box cable and the breakout
box.
Because the breakout box cable is unbalanced, any additional length added to the HiPath 4000
side of the breakout box must be subtracted from the distance on the peripheral device side of
the breakout box. The total distance of the EIA/TIA-232-E cabling from the peripheral device to
the HiPath 4000 must not exceed a total distance of 15.24 m (50 ft.) without the addition of
line drivers.
If the peripheral device is not located near the HiPath 4000, refer to the Siemens HiPath 4000
Customer Site Planning Guide and AC and DC Systems Power and Grounding Specifications,
G281- 0725-00 for detailed power and grounding information.
Install the breakout box (Figure 10-26) as follows:
1. Attach the ground wire to the ground lug on the right side of the breakout box.
2. Attach the other end of the ground wire to the system supplemental ground.
This step is not necessary for new breakout boxes.

>
3. For the wall-mounted breakout box, install the wall-mounting bracket on the wall.
4. Position the breakout box onto the wall-mount bracket or rack as applicable.
5. Install the mounting screws on the left and right ends of the breakout box faceplate.
6. Attach the cables to the breakout box as follows:
a) Attach the breakout box cable SIVAPAC connector to the appropriate card slot location
at the backplane.
b) Attach the breakout box cable Amphenol connector to the breakout box J1 connector.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Installing the Breakout Box
Wall-mounting bracket
Rack-mountable
faceplate
J1
P1
P2
P3
Grounding lug
P4
40000154ger
Figure 10-26 Breakout Box Assembly
Breakout box adapter Breakout box

X X
PB T BO
U
-O
AE K
BR
PBX side
40000155ger
Figure 10-27 Breakout Box Assembly
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Installing the Custom Callout Adapter
10.8 Installing the Custom Callout Adapter

The CCAII is an autodial, autospeed modem that supports HiPath 4000 service and remote ac-
cess features. The CCAII transmits the state of itself and the HiPath 4000 to a predetermined
service center. It also can transmit without HiPath 4000 intervention, loss of power, loss of com-
munication with the HiPath 4000, loss of cable to the HiPath 4000 or external alarm activation.
It also provides the service port for the maintenance terminal.
The CCA II has a data communication equipment (DCE) V.32 port for communication with the
HiPath 4000. A similar port is used to allow service personnel to communicate through the
CCAII as if calling in from an external location. This feature is used for service without the need
to disconnect the CCAII from the HiPath 4000.
Figure 10-28 shows a typical CCAII configuration.
1-MB Telco line
Custom Callout Adapter

PC
MDF
Modem Controller 1
External
power
HiPath 4000 supply
40000010ger
1 - EIA/TIA-232-E cable
Figure 10-28 Typical Custom Callout Adapter II Configuration
10.8.1 Tools Required

The following tools are required to service the CCAII:
● Torx—No. 20 screwdriver
● Modular jack
● An analog line or 1-MB telephone company (telco) line
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
10.8.2 CCA II Connectors

Table 10-4 lists the CCAII connectors and their use.
Connector Use
DC 24 V Input for external 24 V dc power
SYSTEM RS-232 port for the HiPath 4000
ALM1 External alarm input
GND Ground
GND Ground
ALM2 External alarm input
TERMINAL Service port for the Customer Engineer
LINE/TELCO Four-pin jack for analog phone line
PHONE Not used
Table 10-4 Custom Callout Adapter II Connectors
10.8.3 CCA II LED Indications

Table 10-5 lists the CCAII LED indications.
LED Color State Indication

PWR Green On AC or battery power is being supplied to the CCAII.
Off AC or battery power is not being supplied to the CCAII.
OH Green On The CCAII is off-hook using the modem line.
Off The CCAII is not off-hook using the modem line.
BAT Red On The backup battery is faulty or has discharged.
Off The backup battery is good.
FAULT Red Flash The CCAII has detected an error.
On Test mode.
Off No fault exists.
Table 10-5 CCAII LED Indications (Sheet 1 of 3)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm

DCD Green On Data carrier detect. The modem in the CCA is receiving a
suitable carrier signal and is connected to a remote mo-
dem through an analog telephone line.
DCD will be on when there is a connection to a remote mo-
dem and off when it is not connected to a remote modem.
Off The modem in the CCA is not receiving a suitable carrier
signal and is not connected to a remote modem through an
analog telephone line.
AA Green On The CCAII automatically will answer incoming telephone
calls.
Off The CCAII auto answer is disabled.
CTS Green On Clear to send. The modem in the CCAII is ready to trans-
mit data to the HiPath 4000.
CTS is always on when the CCAII is in a functional state.
Off The modem in the CCAII is not ready to send data to the
HiPath 4000.
RTS Green On Request to send. The HiPath 4000 is ready to send data to
the modem in the CCAII.
RTS will be on when the HiPath 4000 port is active and the
correct cable is connected.
Off The HiPath 4000 is not ready to send data to the CCA.
DSR Green On Data set ready. The modem in the CCAII is in a ready
state.
DSR always will be on when the CCAII is in a functional
state.
Off The modem in the CCAII is not in a ready state.
DTR Green On Data terminal ready. The HiPath 4000 is connected to the
CCA and the data link is active.
DTR always will be on when the HiPath 4000 port is active
and the correct cable is connected.
Off The data link is not active or the cable is not connected be-
tween the HiPath 4000 and the CCAII.
RxD Green Flash/On The HiPath 4000 is receiving data from the CCAII.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm

Off The HiPath 4000 is not receiving data from the CCAII.
TxD Green Flash/On The HiPath 4000 is transmitting data to the CCAII.
Off The HiPath 4000 is not transmitting data to the CCAII.
10.8.4 CCA II Cable Connection Table and Pin Assignments

Table 10-6 lists the CCAII custom cable port connections for the HiPath 4000 models.
P-1 Port Location CCA II Custom

System Type V.24/2 Backplane Cable Model Number
HiPath 4500 Port X10, CCDAX 96941
Table 10-6 CCAII Cable Port Connection
Table 10-7 lists the CCAII pin assignments for the HiPath 4000 models.
Custom Callout Adapter II Custom Cable HiPath 4000 Port (P1)

(P2)
2 3
3 2
4 5
5 4
6 20
7 7
20 6
8 23
11 FG*
* FG is frame ground. The CBX end of the cable is tied to the cable head. When connected to a HiPath 4000 port there will
be a ground on the cable head. This ground is connected through the cable on pin 11 to the CCAII. The CCAII monitors this
for ground and if it goes open it will report a cable loss alarm.
Table 10-7 CCAII Custom Cable Pin Assignments
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
10.8.5 Installing the CCAII Power Supply
Mount the CCAII power 24 V d power supply within 2m (6 ft) of a 120 V ac isolated
> ground (IG) convenience outlet.
Ensure you use part number S30122-K5636-X.
Install the CCAII power supply as follows:
1. Using two wall mount screws, install the plastic wall mount bracket and straps, onto the
wall.
2. Install and secure the CCAII power supply in the straps.
3. Connect the ac power cord into the CCAII power supply.
4. Connect the power cord into a 120 V ac IG outlet.
10.8.6 Installing the CCAII

Install the CCAII as follows:
1. Unpack and place the CCAII on a sturdy table or mount it to the wall.
Use no. 6 or 8 one-in. pan-head wood screws. Other walls may require wall an-
> chors.
2. Using the slide switch on the side of the CCA II box, turn on the battery.
10.8.7 Connecting the CCA II

Connect the CCAII as follows:
1. Plug in the 24 V dc power cable from the CCAII power supply to the DC 24 V connector on
the CCAII.
2. Connect the CCA II custom cable as follows:
a) Connect one end of the CCA II custom cable to the CCA II SYSTEM connector,.
b) At the CCDAX backplane, connect the other end of the CCA II custom cable to the con-
nector labeled V24/2 on the backplane of the processor shelf (see Figure 10-29 on
page 10-40).
3. Plug the line/telco cord to the LINE/TELCO connector on the CCAII, and connect the other
end of the line/telco cord to the modular connecting block containing the 1 MB or loop start
analog line.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Ensure the customer has installed a dedicated 1 MB or loop start analog tele-
> phone line and has provided a modular connection for the modem.
Figure 10-29 shows the service port for the Hipath 4500.
Figure 10-29 Service Port, HiPath 4500
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Installing the Distance Adapter
10.9 Installing the Distance Adapter
For additional information, refer to the installation instructions that are shipped with
> the product.
The distance adapter converts the 2-wire U2B1Q interface of the subscriber line module
2B1Q 3 (SLMQ3) board to the UP0/E interface of the Optiset E or OptiPoint telephone.
To install the distance adapter (Figure ):
1. At the back of the distance adapter, connect one end of a line cord to the UP0/E connector.
2. Connect the other end of the line cord to the Optiset E or OptiPoint telephone.
3. At the back of the distance adapter, connect another line cord to the PABX U2B/1Q con-
nector
4. Connect the other end of the line cord to the MDF.
5. Plug the power supply into an ac outlet
6. At the back of the distance adapter, connect the other end of the power supply into the PS
connector.
Figure 5-24 shows the connectivity options for the distance adapters.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
HiPath 4500
2
4
3
U 2B1Q 1
U P0/E
7
SLMQ3
(16 ports) 7 3 4
2
1
U 2B1Q U P0/E
6 5
EIA/TIA-232
40000152ger
1 - Distance adapter
2 - Optiset E (primary)
3 - Analog adapter
4 - Analog device
5 - EIA/TIA-232-E data device
6 - Data adapter
7 - 6000 meters
Figure 10-30 Connectivity Options for the Distance Adapters
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Front View
SIEMENS
Multiport (back view)
To Optiset E telephone To SLMQ3
PABX PABX PABX PABX

UP0/E U2B/1Q UP0/E U2B/1Q UP0/E U2B/1Q UP0/E U2B/1Q PS
Power supply
Single port (back view)
PABX
UP0/E U2B/1Q PS
40000153
Figure 10-31 Distance Adapter
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch10.fm
Installing and Configuring the HiPath ProCenter Server Message Stream
10.10 Installing and Configuring the HiPath ProCenter Server Message

Stream
The HiPath ProCenter server message stream (formerly called message board) is used by Hi-
Path ProCenter server supervisors to display information in the HiPath ProCenter server agent
work area or anywhere within 3 m (1000 ft.) of the HiPath 4000. Please refer to http://www-
dev.eng.sc.rolm.com/pid/enduser/callcntr/procentr/5074_0.pdf for additional information about
this software solution.
10.11 Installing the Music-on-Hold Interface Box

The music-on-hold interface box connects a customer-supplied music source to the system. It
prevents the music volume from increasing to levels that could impair the caller’s hearing.
Install the music-on-hold interface box according to the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
10.12 Installing the Optiset E Adapter Modules

Refer to the Optiset E Entry, Basic, Standard, Advance, and Advance Plus Administrator Guide
for installation instructions for the Optiset E adapter modules.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch11.fm
Installing the HG 3800
Overview
11 Installing the HG 3800

This chapter describes the procedures for installing the HG 3800 Fiber link Extension (Flex
Shelf) hardware components and interfaces. Refer to the HiPath 4000 V1.0 Service Manual for
additional information about the HG 3800.
11.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11.2 Pre-installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.3 Connecting the HG 3800 to the HiPath 4500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.3.1 HG 3800 Hardware: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11.3.2 HG 3800 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.3.3 HG 3800 Connection Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11.3.4 Installing the HG 3800 Controller Desk Top Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
11.3.5 Installing the HG 3800 Controller Rack Mount Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
11.3.6 Installing the HG 3800 Controller Fiber Optic Link Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
11.3.7 Installing the HG 3800 Controller Cross-Connect Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
11.3.8 Installing the HG 3800 Controller Cables on the HiPath 4000 Site . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
11.3.9 Installing the HG 3800 Controller Cables on the Telephony Cabinet Site. . . . . 11-16
11.3.10 Setting the HG 3800 Controller Switch Pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
11.4 Turning on the HG 3800 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
11.5 Configuring the HG 3800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
11.1 Overview
The HG3800 fiber link extension (FLEX) shelf consists of two 19-inch rack-mountable HG3800
controllers that act as passive devices converting HDLC and Voice/Data highway information
for transmission over fiber optic cabling (single or multinode) and AP3300 shelves (Model 30EP
secondary cabinets). The HG3800 controllers work in pairs, one located at the switching unit
location, and the other located at the AP3300 (telephony shelf) end. This configuration allows
for full functioning telephony shelves to be located up to approximately 20 miles from the
switching unit location.
A Siemens-recommended uninterruptable power source (UPS) is available to pro-

> vide protection from power outages. An internal backup battery is not available for
the AP3300 shelf.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch11.fm
Pre-installation Requirements
Figure 11-1 shows a two-shelf simplex narrowband system.
4
3
Optical Fiber Links
3
1
~
~
2 1
FLEX FLEX Co-Located

FLEX Shelves
CC Shelf
1 - Common control shelf

2 - FLEX shelf
3 - Optical fiber links
4 - Co-located FLEX shelves
Figure 11-1 HiPath HG 3800 Basic Configuration
The main components of the HG 3800 feature are:

● HiPath AP 3300
● HiPath AP 3300 Fiber
● HiPath HG 3800
For additional information about HG 3800. refer to the global HiPath 4000 Service Manual.
11.2 Pre-installation Requirements

Ensure the following power requirements are met before installing the HG 3800:
● The HG 3800 controller must be located within 1.8 m (6 ft.) of the nearest 120 Vac, 15A
receptacle, in conformity with national/local electrical codes, powered from the same panel
serving the associated host system / HG 3800-Shelf. US/Canada power cord has NEMA
5-15 plug. Extension power cords must not be used; if an outlet socket is needed it must
be installed by the customer's electrician.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch11.fm
Connecting the HG 3800 to the HiPath 4500
● The power receptacle for the HG 3800 controller must be 120 V ac, at 50 - 60Hz. The HG
3800 controller is rated at 120 - 240 V ac, 1.2 -0.2A, to accommodate installation world-
wide.
The HG 3800 requires a TN power system, which refers to a system in which an outlet’s
neutral wire is grounded at the power distribution panel.
The HG 3800 maybe powered from any 120-240 Vac/50-60 HZ source. In Can-
> ada and U.S., a power cord with a NEMA 5-15 plug is provided. In other markets,
a suitable power cord must be provided.
● The required ambient conditions are as follows:
– Temperature range: 5 - 40 degrees C (40 - 104 degrees F)
– Altitude: 3000 m (10,000 feet)
– Relative humidity: 5-85%
● For rack mount installations, install in open sided racks only. The ventilation openings on
the sides of each unit must not be blocked. No clearance above or below is required.
● For table or shelf installation, the HG 3800 controller is not specified to carry the weight of
any items with exception to other properly installed HG 3800 controllers.
● Use OFNR type (flame resistant optical fiber) cables with MT-RJ connectors only for the
links between HG 3800 controllers.
● The 1-SU SIPAC cable shipped with each HG 3800 controller only must be used installed
with the grounding ferrule bonded to the host system / HG 3800-Shelf to meet EMC re-
quirements.
Do not use the cables in the PBX; SIPAC cables of differing lengths cannot
>
●
be used.
11.3 Connecting the HG 3800 to the HiPath 4500

The HG 3800 is a HiPath 4000 cabinet (CAB80DSC1 with 16 slots for peripheral boards), which
can be operated remotely from the system. Connection to the system is by means of optical
fiber cables and 2 HG 3800 devices.
Unlike Hicom 300 RMS, a slot in the LTU is not necessary on the system side for the HG 3800
shelf interface. The connection to the HG 3800 shelf runs directly from the central control
(CCDAX/CC80F), from the CC LTU cable slots. The combination of the optical fiber cable and
HG 3800 can thus be considered an extended CC LTU cable.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch11.fm
Caution
7 The shielding of all front cables must be bonded at the shelf opening with two ca-
bles fasteners per frame (with the exception of network cables and optical fiber ca-
bles).
Ensure that the system’s maximum configuration has not been exceeded by the HG
> 3800 shelf. For example, a Hicom 330 H with a maximum configuration of 4 LTUs
with 2 HG 3800 shelves installed in the system can only have an additional configu-
ration of max. 2 LTUs.
:
The HiPath system may remain switched on throughout this procedure.

>
To connect the HG 3800 to the HiPath 4500:
1. Install the central Flex Controller (refer to Section 11.3.4, “Installing the HG 3800 Controller
Desk Top Option”)
a) Assemble the devices.
b) Insert the optical fiber cable module(s) into the Flex Controller (refer to Section 11.3.6,
“Installing the HG 3800 Controller Fiber Optic Link Modules”, step 7.
c) Set the dip switch on the Flex Controller (refer to Figure 11-3 on page 11-6).
d) While the Flex Controller is deactivated, connect the LTU cables (refer to Section
11.3.8, “Installing the HG 3800 Controller Cables on the HiPath 4000 Site”).
e) Plug in the optical fiber cables.
f) Turn on the power (refer to Section 11.4, “Turning on the HG 3800 Controller”).
2. Install the remote shelf and remote Flex Controller.
a) Assemble the devices.
b) Insert the optical fiber cable module(s) into the Flex Controller.
c) Set the dip switch on the Flex Controller.
d) Connect the cables (MDF, LTU cable, optical fiber cable).
e) Turn on the power.
Figure 11-2 on page 11-5 shows a connectivity diagram of the Hicom 330H stack.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch11.fm
Cable from Common Cable from Common

Control (5 m) Control (5 m)
CAB80DSC1 Maximum of 3 for every
Maximum of 3 for every
HG 3800 HG 3800
1x or 2x Optical fiber cable(s)

CAB80DSC1 Single or multi-node
CAB80DSC CAB80DSC1
HG 3800 HG 3800
Optical fiber cable module

FMS for single-mode optical fiber cable
FMM for multi-mode optical fiber cable
Figure 11-2 Example of HiPath 4500 Stack with Mono/Dual Control and a Nonredundant
Power Supply Unit
11.3.1 HG 3800 Hardware:

The CAB80DSC1 cabinet for Hicom 330 H CXE with shelf L80XF and LTU Controller LTUCX.
16 slots for peripheral boards, 1 special slot for installing the RGE board and the option to plug
in an RG module at the back.
Irrespective of the type of power supply used by the unit, the HG 3800 shelf always has a non-
redundant power supply provided by means of the LPC80 power supply module (as for Hicom
330 H CXE). In 110V AC current networks, 2-phase AC power is a minimum requirement for
operation.
As in the HiPath 4500 stack, a maximum of four HG 3800 shelves can be stacked at each lo-
cation.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch11.fm
11.3.2 HG 3800 Summary
FLEX-SHELF™ Controller
Common Control LTU Shelf
LTU FLEX-FLEX LTU Power
Active Connection Active Fail
Primary A Primary B Relay A Relay B LTU Link 1
-
Rx Rx Rx Rx LTU Link 2
Self
Tx Tx Tx Tx LTU Link 3 Test Power
Lnk Lnk Lnk Lnk LTU Link 4
MST
LWL-Steckmodule SLV
OF plug-in boards Lnk
Crosslink- Crosslink plug-in board

Steckmodul
Figure 11-3 HG 3800 Flex Shelf Controller (Front View)
Power ON
CC/LTU Link 1 CC/LTU Link 2 CC/LTU Link 3 CC/LTU Link 4
Configuration RS-232
Figure 11-4 HG 3800 Flex Shelf Controller (Back View)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch11.fm
11.3.3 HG 3800 Connection Configurations
MDF
Back
L80XF
(LTU1)
CAB80DSC1
CABPR
CAB80DSC1
Switch CABPR L80XF
settings (LTU8)
12345678 Plug-in cable
Back
12345678 FLEX
Shelf Optical fibre cable with
Controller MTRJ interface
Optional opt.
redundancy
Plug-in cable
Back
CCDAX
8 8
1 9 1 9
2 1 2 1
3 1 3 1
4 1 4 1
5 1 5 1 CABCCD
6 1 6 1 base
7 1 7 1
1B LTUS 2B 1A LTUS 2A
V24 SCSI
CC80F (80CXE) S30804-B5377-X / -B5386 -X1
L80XF S30804-B5379-X
FLEX Controller S30807-U6495-X
Plug-in cable S30267-Z315-A50
Optical fibre cable: multi-mode 1300 nm, 62.5/125 mm, 2km range
single-mode 1300 nm, 9/125 mm, 15km range
FLEX submodule multi-mode S30807-Q6496-X1
FLEX submodule single-mode S30807-Q6496-X2
Figure 11-5 Connecting L80XF By Means of HG 3800 to CC80F (80CXE)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch11.fm
CAB80DSC1 CAB80DSC1
CABPR CABPR
Back L80XF Back L80XF

Switch settings (LTU3) (LTU10)
12345678 12345678
Plug-in cable
FXM
FXM
Front Front
Back FMM or
FMS
Optical Optical fiber

fiber cable Back
cable CLK sync. Optional FLEX Shelf
Optional FLEX Shelf
redundancy Controller redundancy Controller
FMM or
FMS
Front Front
Back Back
12345678
Plug-in cable
12345678
8 8 SCSI
1 9 1 9
2 1 2 1 V24
3 1 3 1
4 1 4 1 Back
5 1 5 1 CABCCD
6 1 6 1 base
CCDAX 7 1 7 1
CC80F (80CXE) S30804-B5377-X / -B5386 -X1
L80XF S30804-B5379-X
Clock sync cable C39196-A7269-B601
Optical fiber cable: multi-mode 1300 nm, 62.5/125 mm, 2km range
each with MTRJ interface
FMM: FLEX fiber module multi-mode S30807-Q6496-X1
FMS: FLEX fiber module single-mode S30807-Q6496-X2
FXM: FLEX cross connect module S30807-Q6581-X
Figure 11-6 Connecting L80XF with a Redundant HG 3800 to the CCDAX (Duplex) Cabinet
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch11.fm
Switch settings 12345678
Front Plug-in cable

CAB80DSC1
L80XF CABPR
(LTU5) Back
Optical
fiber Back
cable 12345678
Front Plug-in cable

CAB80DSC1
L80XF CABPR
Optical (LTU4)
fiber Back
cable
12345678
Front Plug-in cable

CAB80DSC1
L80XF CABPR
Optical (LTU3)
fiber Back
cable
12345678 Plug-in cable
FLEX Shelf CCDAX Back

Controller Front
Back
8 8
1 9 1 9
Primary A
Primary B
2 1 2 1
Relay A
Relay B
Link2
Link1
Link3
Link4
3 1 3 1
4 1 4 1
5 1 5 1 CABCCD
6 1 6 1 base
7 1 7 1
CCDAX (600ECS / 600ECX) S30804-B5384-X / -X1
L80XF S30804-B5379-X SCSI
V24
Optical fiber cable: multi-mode 1300 nm, 62.5/125 mm, 2km range
each with MTRJ interface
FLEX submodule multi-mode S30807-Q6496-X1
FLEX submodule single-mode S30807-Q6496-X2
Figure 11-7 Connecting L80XF By Means of the HG 3800 to the CCDAX Cabinet
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch11.fm
11.3.4 Installing the HG 3800 Controller Desk Top Option

To install the HG 3800 FLEX controller desk top option:
1. Unpack and place the HG 3800, FLEX controller(s) on a sturdy table as per the site require-
ments noted for power and proximity to its associated cabinet.
2. Install the soft plastic supports provided for each HG 3800 FLEX controller (four for every
controller) at the corners by positioning the foot with the indented end up.
Perform this step for all HG 3800 controllers to be installed at this location.
WARNING
1 Ensure there is a minimum of 4 inches of clearance on each side of the HG 3800
controllers for proper ventilation. No clearance above or below is required.
3. Align the rectangular tab into bottom slot on the HG 3800 FLEX controller, then gently slide
the upper end with the angled tab into place in the upper slot (see Figure 11-8 on page
11-11).
4. Stack the HG 3800 controllers on top of each other, aligning the feet to one another above
and below.
5. Proceed to the appropriate procedure for the PBX or telephony shelf to complete the in-
stallation tasks at this location
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch11.fm
Figure 11-8 HG 3800 Stacked Controllers and Feet Positioning
11.3.5 Installing the HG 3800 Controller Rack Mount Option

Install the HG 3800 controller rack mount option as follows:
1. Unpack and place the FLEX controller(s) on a sturdy surface and ensure that the 19 inch
rack to be used is within the site requirements noted for power and proximity to its associ-
ated cabinet.
2. Install the rack mount tabs for each FLEX controller (two per controller) at the front corners
with the screws provided (see Figure 11-8 on page 11-11).
Perform this step for all HG 3800 controllers to be installed at this location.
WARNING
1 Do not install the HG 3800 controller in an enclosed rack and ensure there is a
minimum of 4 inches of clearance on each side of the HG 3800 controllers for
proper ventilation. No clearance above or below is required.
3. Position the HG 3800 controllers one at a time on the rack and attach using the appropriate
screws. Rack screws are not provided in the HG 3800 installation kit.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch11.fm
4. Proceed to the appropriate procedure for the PBX or telephony shelf to complete the in-
stallation tasks at this location.
11.3.6 Installing the HG 3800 Controller Fiber Optic Link Modules

HG 3800 control fiber optic link modules are installed at the factory for new installations.
To expand or modify the existing HG 3800 installation, install the HG 3800 controller fiber optic
link modules as follows (see Figure 11-9):
Caution
7 This procedure disables the associated telephony shelves.
For each segment of a HG 3800 configuration, the module types (for example, single
or multi-mode) must match.
1. Remove power from the HG 3800 controller for the duration of this procedure.
2. Determine which slots are going to receive the fiber optic link modules.
3. Remove the two Torx screws holding the cover plate over the housing slot.
4. Line the module up with the slots on the controller and slide the module into place.
5. Press down firmly around the module until it is properly seated.
6. Reinstall the torx screws securing the module into place.
7. Install the appropriate fiber optic cables as specified in the site requirements to the HG
3800 controller and the network.
Figure 11-9 Fiber Module Installation
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch11.fm
11.3.7 Installing the HG 3800 Controller Cross-Connect Modules

HG 3800 control cross-connect modules are installed at the factory for new installations. Use
the following procedure for expanding or modifying an HG 3800 installation.
The cross-connect module is used only on configurations that have redundant HG 3800 con-
trollers and duplex switching units on the HiPath 4000. Cross-connect modules are installed at
the AP 3300 shelf side of the connection only; each must be installed in the right-most (Relay B)
slot of the controller.
Figure 11-10 on page 14 shows all related cross-connect hardware and cable.
To install the HG 3800 controller cross-connect modules:
Power should be removed from the HG 3800 controller until this procedure has been
> completed.
Caution
7 Telephony does not function on the associated telephony shelves until this proce-
dure has been completed.
1. Remove the two torx screws holding the cover plate over the housing for the Relay B slot.
2. Line the module up with the slots on the controller and slide the module into place.
3. Press down firmly around the module until it is properly seated.
4. Reinstall the torx screws securing the module into place.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 5 on the remaining controller(s).
6. Install the cross-connect cable(s) (part number C39195-A7289-9801-1-B only).
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch11.fm
Figure 11-10 Cross-Connect Modules and Related Hardware for Redundant Switching Unit
Configurations with Redundant Controllers.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch11.fm
11.3.8 Installing the HG 3800 Controller Cables on the HiPath 4000 Site
After completing the rack mount or desk top option installation and installing any HG 3800 con-
troller fiber optic link modules, install the HG 3800 at the host PBX site.
You must turn off the common control cabinet otherwise damage can occur on the
> equipment.
To connect the HG 3800 controller to the host HiPath 4000:

1. Determine which LTUP shelf or shelves are designated for use with the HG 3800 feature.
2. Identify the end of the 1 SU SIPAC cable that has the metal ferrule. Connect this end to the
proper LTU connector on the backplane of the HiPath 4000 cabinet and secure the cable
to the cabinet.
3. Connect the other end of the 1 SU SIPAC cable to the appropriate CC/LTU link 1-4 connec-
tor on the HG 3800 controller as shown in Figure 11-4 on page 11-6.
Caution
7 When dressing the SIPAC cables on the HG 3800 controller, take extreme care
that they are not pulled tight or bent in any extreme manner. Cable failure can
result if this is not observed.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each shelf and all controllers as applicable.
5. Connect the fiber cable(s) as appropriate between the HG 3800 controller and the network
equipment.
Caution
7 If dressing of the fiber optic cables is necessary, do not cause the sheathing of
the cable to be crimped in any manner. The cable may not function if this occurs.
6. :
Power can be applied to the PBX at this time, however if the network and tele-
> phony shelf connections are not yet complete and powered up major alarms will
occur until all connections are complete and functioning properly.
Apply power to the HG 3800 controllers.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch11.fm
11.3.9 Installing the HG 3800 Controller Cables on the Telephony

Cabinet Site
After completing the rack mount or desk top option, and installing any HG 3800 controller fiber
optic link modules perform this procedure at the telephony shelf site.
To connect the HG 3800 controller to the 30EP expansion cabinet:
1. Determine which LTUP shelf or shelves are designated for use with the HG 3800 feature.
2. Identify the end of the 1 SU SIPAC cable that has the metal ferrule. Connect this end to the
proper LTU connector on the backplane of the 30EP expansion cabinet and secure the
grounding ferrule to the cabinet.
3.
Caution
7 When dressing the SIPAC cables on the HG 3800 controller, take extreme care
that they are not pulled tight or bent in any extreme manner. Cable failure can
result if this is not observed.
Connect the other end of the 1 SU SIPAC cable to the appropriate CC/LTU link 1-4 connec-
tor on the HG 3800 controller as shown in Figure 11-4 on page 11-6.
Repeat this step for each telephony shelf and all controllers, if applicable.
4.
Caution
7 If dressing of the fiber optic cables is necessary, do not cause the sheathing of
the cable to be crimped in any manner. The cable may not function if this occurs.
Connect the fiber cable(s) as appropriate between the HG 3800 controller and the network
equipment.
5. .
You can apply power to the telephony shelf or shelves at this time, however if the
> network and PBX connections are not yet complete and powered up, major
alarms can occur until all connections are complete and functioning properly.
Proceed with applying power to the HG 3800 controller(s).
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch11.fm
Turning on the HG 3800 Controller
11.3.10 Setting the HG 3800 Controller Switch Pack

The HG 3800 controller has a single switch pack for configuring the operational modes (see
Switch Up Position Down Position

S1 HG 3800 is located at AP 3300 shelf site. HG 3800 is located at PBX site.
S2 CC/LTU link 1 is used. CC/LTU link 1 is not used.
S6,7,8 Not used. Not used.
Table 11-1 HG 3800 Controller Switch Settings
11.4 Turning on the HG 3800 Controller

To turn on the HG 3800 controller:
1. Attach the HG 3800 controller power cord to the HG 3800 controller.
2. Plug the HG 3800 controller power cord into the designated 120-Vac outlet.
3. Switch the power switch located at the back of the HG 3800 controller to the on position.
11.5 Configuring the HG 3800

Configure the HG 3800 as follows:
1. Log in to the A1 server using the rsca ID.
2. Access Direct AMO Dialog by selecting Direct AMO Dialog at the main menu of rsca.
3. Type ADD-UCSU and press Enter.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch11.fm
Configuring the HG 3800
4. Type the following values, then press Enter.

Field Value
UNIT LTU
LTG 1
LTU <1 - 15>
LTPARTNO <Q2189-X100 or Q2189-X300>
FRMTYPE L80XF
CONNTYPE FLEX
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch12.fm
Installing the IPDA
Overview
12 Installing the IPDA

This chapter describes the connection of the HiPath 4500 to the (IP Distributed Architecture)
IPDA system. It also provides procedures to install the HiPath IPDA components. Refer to the
HiPath 4000 V1.0 Service Manual for additional information about the IPDA.
12.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

12.2 IPDA Installation Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.2.1 Free-standing IPDA AP 3500/3505 IP Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
12.2.2 Standard 19-Inch AP 3500/3505 IP Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
12.2.3 IPDA 19-Inch Base Cabinet Shelf Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.2.4 IPDA 19-Inch Expansion Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.2.5 Patch Panel Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.2.5.1 External Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.2.5.2 Internes Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
12.3 Grounding the HiPath AP 3500 IP/AP 3505 IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
12.4 AC connections of the IPDA system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
12.5 Connecting HiPath AP 3500 IP/AP 3505 IP to the Mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
12.6 Connecting the PSDSC and LUNA to the Mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
12.7 Internal Cabling of the IPDA 19-Inch System (AP3500/3505 IP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
12.1 Overview
Figure 12-1 on page 12-2 shows a diagram of the HiPath 4500/IPDA connectivity. In this
scenario, the system is assembled using HiPath IPDA modules instead of separate cabinets.
These systems can be installed as free-standing systems or can be built into a 19-inch cabinet.
HiPath 4500 supports up to 40 access points connected over IP (AP 3300 IP or AP 3500/3505
IP) as well as up to 3 shelves that are connected directly (AP 3300).
HiPath 4000 facilitates the distribution of access points over an IP network. These access
points are shelves (AP 3300 IP or AP 3500/3505 IP), which accommodate standard HiPath
4000 interface modules. The stations at the access points are treated in exactly the same way
as if they were directly connected to a HiPath 4000 system as before. All IP-distributed com-
ponents are administered as a single system over one HiPath 4000 system connection point.
The illustrations show minimum dimensions in millimeters (mm).

>
The system consists of a maximum 4 stacks and one power management unit attached to each
other in a single row. The system can be placed anywhere in the room (maximum expansion
of 15 LTUW = 5760 ports). Each stack can be configured with up to 4 boxes. The stacks are
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch12.fm
Installing the IPDA
Overview
permanently connected. A maximum of 6 wall main distribution frames (MDFHX6) can be used.
This is equivalent to an expansion of up to a maximum of 2304 ports (refer to Figure “HiPath
4500 Expansion Overview”).
Cabling should only be configured underfloor (double floor). The reference point for system ca-
bling is located at the lower end of the stack (see Figure 5-7 on page 5-7).
The system can also be configured using IPDA instead of one single stack (maximum of four
boxes for every stack). These systems can be installed as free-standing systems or can be built
into a 19-inch cabinet.
HiPath 4500 supports up to 83 IP-connected access points (AP 3300 IP or AP 3500/3505 IP)
in addition to up to 15 directly connected module ftames (AP 3300).
HiPath 4000 facilitates the distribution of access points over an IP network. These access
points are frames (AP 3300 IP or AP 3500/3505 IP), which include standard HiPath 4000 inter-
face modules. User connetion to access points is identical to standard, direct connection to a
HiPath 4000 system. Administration of all IP-distributed components is carried out as a single
system using a HiPath 4000 system connection point.
HG HG Periph
3570 3575 modules
AP 3300 IP
HG
3570
HiPath 4000 LAN Segment
IP network
Periph
modules
HG Periph
3575 modules
Open AP 3500/3505 IP
network CC
Open
HiPath 4000 network
Figure 12-1 System Architecture Overview
Each cabinet, including front covers form a shielded unit. Ensure to lock the cabinets
> while the system is running and replace the covers immediately following testing and
maintenance.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch12.fm
Installing the IPDA
IPDA Installation Variants
12.2 IPDA Installation Variants

This section provides two examples IPDA system installations: wall (in front of a wall but not-
wall-mounted) and free-standing (in the middle of the equipment room).
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch12.fm
Installing the IPDA
12.2.1 Free-standing IPDA AP 3500/3505 IP Installation

The free-standing installation consists of the following:
● Basic BP-NBB configuration -> control + switch
● An MDF patch panel is mounted on the wall to the right, left or behind the system
● Specified cabling units 24 DA with a film shield
● Standard length 2m/5m from reference point to reference point or plug-in cable with film
shield, cable length has to be planned.
Figure 12-2 shows a diagram of a free-standing 19-inch IPDA installation.
Note: MDF PP is behind the system
490 220
MDF patch panel
Housing
30 226
#)
Box-NEB
(BP-NEB)
266
Box-NBB
(BP-NBB)
416
-> Reference point Cable duct

-From above
#) Recommended size 110 x 60mm
Patch panel
220
416 Box NBB/

NEB
440
Front
Figure 12-2 Free-Standing IPDA Installation
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch12.fm
Installing the IPDA
Acronym Definition
PP Patch panel
BP-NBB Backplane NBCS (IPDA) base box
NBB NBCS (IPDA) base box
NEB NBCS expansion box
12.2.2 Standard 19-Inch AP 3500/3505 IP Cabinet Installation

A standard 19-inch cabinet installation consists of the following:
● MDF patch panels are built into the standard cabinet
● Specified cabling units 24 DA with film shield
● Standard length 2m/5m from reference point to reference point
Figure 12-3 shows a diagram of a standard 19-inch cabinet installation.
HE = Height unit 44.45 mm

19"
416
450
160
44.5
1HE
Patch
panel
MDF patch panel
NEB box
444.5
(BP-NEB)
10HE
Bracket
NBB box
(BP-NBB)
Angle
Figure 12-3 Standard 19-Inch Cabinet Installation
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch12.fm
Installing the IPDA
12.2.3 IPDA 19-Inch Base Cabinet Shelf Configuration

The IPDA system varies according to the customer configuration. Refer to the hardware map
during installation.
Table 12-1 lists the IPDA 19-inch base cabinet shelf configuration.
Slot Port Modules Slot

index
4 Control module 1* LUNA
3 26-96 Peripheral/special module 5
2 25-48 Peripheral/special module 5 LUNA *
* Modules included in the basic frame configuration are:
● LUNA PSU, S30124-X5143-X
● HG 3575 (NCUI), S30810-Q2302-X
Table 12-1 19-Inch Base Cabinet Shelf Configuration, S30807-Q6619-X
12.2.4 IPDA 19-Inch Expansion Cabinet

Table 12-1 lists the IPDA 19-inch expansion cabinet shelf configuration.
Slot Port Modules Slot

index
8 73-96 Peripheral/special module 5 LUNA
6 25-48 Peripheral/special module 5 LUNA *
* Module included in the basic frame configuration is:
● LUNA PSU, S30124-X5143-X
Table 12-2 19-Inch Expansion Cabinet Shelf Configuration, S30807-Q6620-X
12.2.5 Patch Panel Cabling
12.2.5.1 External Patch Panel

When connecting an external patch panel to the 19“ system, proceed as follows (see also the
following figures):
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch12.fm
Installing the IPDA
1. First, connect the open-end cable to the backplane of the system (item 1).
2. Secure each open-end cable to its corresponding blank panel with a cable tie (item 2).
3. Secure the corresponding blank panel to the backside of the system (items 3 and 4).
4. If you need to connect an expansion cabinet, first unscrew all panels from the backside of
the system (basic and expansion cabinet) plug in the connecting cable and run each con-
necting cable out of the cabinet on the bottom left. Secure the connecting cable to the cab-
inet’s frame with a cable tie (item 5).
5. After installation, the entire backside of the shelf needs to be covered with blank panels
(Item 6).
2 3
1
4
6
5
Figure 12-4 Example of external patch panel installation
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch12.fm
Installing the IPDA
12.2.5.2 Internes Patch Panel

Internal patch panels are connected directly to the backplane of the 19" system. With this so-
lution, you no longer need any open-end cables. When cabling a system with an expansion
cabinet, proceed as follows:
1. First, unscrew all patch panels from the backside of the system (basic and expansion cab-
inet) and plug in the connecting cable. Run each connecting cable out of the cabinet on the
bottom left. Secure the connecting cable to the cabinet’s frame with a cable tie (item 1).
2. Connect all patch panels back onto the backplane of the system. Pay attention that the
separate patch panels are inserted straightly into their corresponding guide slots on the
patch panel (item 2). Screw the patch panels back onto the cabinet’s frame.
3. After insatllation, the entire backside of the shelf needs to either be covered with blank pan-
els or with internal patch panels (depending on system configuration).
1
2
Figure 12-5 Example of internal patch panel installation
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch12.fm
Installing the IPDA
Grounding the HiPath AP 3500 IP/AP 3505 IP
12.3 Grounding the HiPath AP 3500 IP/AP 3505 IP

The 19-inch HiPath IP distributed architecture (IPDA) AP 3500 IP/AP 3505 IP (base cabinet
and expansion cabinet) can operate as a free-standing system or it can be built into a 19-inch
cabinet.
To ground the IPDA system (see Figure 12-6):
1. Connect the ground connector supplied (1) between the base cabinet and the expansion
cabinet, if available.
2. Connect the building ground connection (2) to the base cabinet.
2
Figure 12-6 Grounding the HiPath AP 3500 IP/AP 3505 IP
12.4 AC connections of the IPDA system

Figure 12-7 on page 12-10 shows the ac connections of the IPDA system.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch12.fm
Installing the IPDA
AC connections of the IPDA system
MDF patch panel
FPE cable
Cabinet NEB * -U6620-X #-A7630-B500
F
RGMOD LUNA A
BP NEB (WG/RG) (1) N
* -Q6620-X (1)
(2)
LUNA
(2)
f. IM: # -Z7001-C55
230V/ f. NA: # -Z7000-C92
115V
F
RGMOD LUNA A
BP NBB (WG/RG) (1) N
* -Q6619-X (1)
(2)
LUNA
(2)
230V/
Cabinet NBB * -U6619-X 115V
FPE cable
gnyn
* = S30807-U/Q....
# = C39195-
NBB = Base cabinet Ground busbar

NEB = Expansion cabinet
Figure 12-7 AC Connections of the IPDA System
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch12.fm
Installing the IPDA
Connecting HiPath AP 3500 IP/AP 3505 IP to the Mains
12.5 Connecting HiPath AP 3500 IP/AP 3505 IP to the Mains
In Canada and U.S. the AP 3500 IP and AP 3505 IP are rated for 120 Vac only. A
> suitable power cord is provided.
The HiPath AP 3500 IP/AP 3505 IP (see Figure 12-8)) system only operates with a mains volt-
age of 230 Vac.
Figure 12-8 Connecting HiPath AP 3500 IP/AP 3505 IP to the Mains
To prevent failure of the power supply, connect two power supply units in parallel.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch12.fm
Installing the IPDA
Connecting the PSDSC and LUNA to the Mains
12.6 Connecting the PSDSC and LUNA to the Mains

Figure 12-9 shows the connectivity diagram of the PSDSC and the LUNA power supply.
This part of the illustration
applies to Canada and U.S.
L1
1 phase-system with L2 3-phase system
A L3
centre point B N ~ 120V/208V
~ 110V/220V N (PE) PE ~ 127V/220V
~ 120V/240V
~ 120V/240V Fuse Fuse
16 A 16 A
L1
L2 3-phase system
L3 ~ 230V/400V
N ~ 230V/400V
PE
Fuse
16A
This part of the illustration PE N L1

applies to I.M. and Europe. (L3) International
GNYE BU BK1 character code
for colors
Cable 3x1.52
1 multiple socket outlet

with max. 5 sockets
PSDSC/LUNA
Figure 12-9 Connecting the PSDSC or LUNA Power Supply to the Mains
To connect the PSDSC or LUNA power supply to the mains:

1. Connect the power cable to the LPC80 power supply unit of the base cabinet, if this has
not already been done.
2. Secure the power cable with a clip and lead it around to the back of the system (see Figure
12-10 on page 12-13).
3. If you have a multiple-cabinet system, repeat this procedure for the expansion cabinets.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch12.fm
Installing the IPDA
Connecting the PSDSC and LUNA to the Mains
4. Route all power cables from the power supply units down behind the backplane of the base
cabinet and connect the individual connectors to the mains socket (see Figure 12-11).
Figure 12-10 Routing the Power Cable
Figure 12-11 Connecting the HiPath 4500 to the Mains
Figure 12-11 shows an illustration for the I.M. Canada and U.S. use a different outlet
> strip.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch12.fm
Installing the IPDA
Internal Cabling of the IPDA 19-Inch System (AP3500/3505 IP)
12.7 Internal Cabling of the IPDA 19-Inch System (AP3500/3505 IP)

HiPath 4500 supports up to 40 access points (AP 3300 IP or AP 3500/3505 IP) connected over
IP in addition to the three directly connected shelves (AP 3300). These individual access points
are connected by means of the LAN port of the HG3575 (NCUI-BG) board.
The internal cabling between the base cabinet and expansion cabinet in this system consists
of the following connection cables (see Figure 12-12).
● Grounding cable (1)
● System cable (2)
A ring generator (RGMOD) can be inserted into the X15 connector at the back of each back-
plane (3).
Caution
7 Make sure that the power has been switched off before installing or removing the
ring generator.
2
1
Figure 12-12 IPDA Internal Cabling
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch13.fm
Starting the System
Completing the Installation
13 Starting the System

This chapter describes procedures for starting the HiPath 4500.
13.1 Completing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

13.2 Pre-Power On Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.2.1 Reseating the Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.2.2 Checking the Signal Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.2.3 Checking the Power Distribution Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.3 Turning On a Non-Redundant AC-Powered HiPath 4500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.4 Turning On Cabinets 1 and 2 of a Redundant AC-Powered HiPath 4500 . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.5 Turning On Cabinet 3 and 4 of a Redundant AC-Powered HiPath 4500. . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.6 Turning On Cabinet 1 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
13.10 Installing PROCOMM PLUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13.11 Enabling Clock Batteries on the DSCX and DPC5 Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13.12 Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13.13 Installing the Customer Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13.13.1 Factory-Generated Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13.13.2 Site-Generated Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13.14 Starting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
13.15 Connecting to the TAP, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
13.16 Running the Dongle Code Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
13.17 Replacing the Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
13.1 Completing the Installation

Once you have completed the installation process, double-check the items in Table 13-1.
Check Completed?
1. Screw connections secure?
2. Grounding system connected correctly (system/MDF)?
Refer to Section 6, “Grounding the HiPath 4500”, on page 6-1.
3. Mains connection protected by fuses?
4. Power supply connected correctly (internal/external)?
Section 7, “Connecting the Power Supply”.
Table 13-1 Post Installation Checklist
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch13.fm
Starting the System
Pre-Power On Checks
Check Completed?
5. Cable connectors secure?
Refer to Section 13.2.2, “Checking the Signal Cable Connections”.
6. Cables laid correctly (with cable grips)?
Refer to Section 8, “Installing Cables” and Section 9, “External Cabling
Assemblies”.
7. MDF layout plan completed?
8. Covers replaced correctly (necessary only if the system is not started im-
mediately after installation)?
Refer to Section 13.17, “Replacing the Covers”.
9. Documentation assembled and handed over to the customer?
Table 13-1 Post Installation Checklist
13.2 Pre-Power On Checks

Perform the following procedures before you apply power to the system.
13.2.1 Reseating the Boards
Do not use ESD procedures when working with power supplies.

> If any power supplies becomes unseated during transport, reseat it by gently push-
ing it toward the backplane until it seats in place.
If any board becomes unseated during transport, reseat it as follows:
1. Follow the electrostatic discharge prevention procedures.
2. Insert the peg of the board removal tool into the hole at the top of the unseated board .
3. Lift the board removal tool and completely unseat the board.
4. Remove the board removal tool.
5. Gently push the board toward the backplane until it seats in the backplane connector.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch13.fm
Starting the System
Turning On a Non-Redundant AC-Powered HiPath 4500
13.2.2 Checking the Signal Cable Connections

LTU shelf signal cables are signal cables that originate at the LTU shelf backplane.
To ensure that all signal cable connections are secure:
1. Check that all signal cables are tightly secured at the connector on each shelf backplane.
2. Check that the connectors on the other end of the signal cables are tightly secured.
3. If signal cables were disconnected during transit, refer to the hardware map to connect and
secure these cables to the proper locations.
13.2.3 Checking the Power Distribution Cable Connections

The system is shipped with the power distribution cables already connected to the backplane.
These cables may become disconnected during transit. To check that the power distribution ca-
ble connections in each cabinet:
1. Check for loose or disconnected power distribution cable connections at the backplanes.
2. If there are any loose or disconnected power distribution cable connections, refer to the
hardware map to connect and secure these cables to the proper locations.
13.3 Turning On a Non-Redundant AC-Powered HiPath 4500

To turn on a non-redundant ac-powered HiPath 4500:
1. Remove the tie-wrap from the power cord and uncoil.
2. Plug the ac power cord to the wall outlet.
3. Plug the other end of the ac power cord to the LPC80.
4. Turn on the power switch on the LPC80.
5. Turn on the power switch on the PSUP.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch13.fm
Starting the System
Turning On Cabinets 1 and 2 of a Redundant AC-Powered HiPath 4500
13.4 Turning On Cabinets 1 and 2 of a Redundant AC-Powered HiPath

4500
WARNING
1 Observe all applicable safety precautions when working with high voltages.
To turn on cabinet 1 of an ac-powered HiPath 4500:
1. Plug in the HiPath 4500 power cord to the wall outlet.
2. At the back of cabinet, under the CCDAX shelf, turn on the main circuit breaker (see Figure
13-2 on page 13-7).
3. At the UACD stack 1ACDPX, turn on the ac input power switches.
4. At the UACD stack 1 PDPX2, turn on the ac output power module (PM1, PM2, and PM3)
circuit breakers.
5. At the UACD stack 1 PDPX2 panel, turn on the –48 V BULK and –48 V TALK circuit break-
ers.
6. At the back of UACD stack 1, turn on the backup battery circuit breaker.
The ECCB is not used in the U.S.

>
7. Turn on the dc-to-dc shelf power supplies in the following order:
a) Shelf 1
b) Remaining dc-to-dc shelf power supplies
8. At the UACD stack 1 PDPX2, turn on the power share circuit breaker.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch13.fm
Starting the System
Turning On Cabinet 3 and 4 of a Redundant AC-Powered HiPath 4500
13.5 Turning On Cabinet 3 and 4 of a Redundant AC-Powered HiPath

4500
WARNING
To turn on cabinet 3 of an ac-powered HiPath 4500:
1. Plug in the HiPath 4500 power cord to the wall outlet.
2. At the back of cabinet, under the CCDAX shelf, turn on the main circuit breaker (see Figure
13-2 on page 13-7).
3. At the UACD stack 2 ACDPX, turn on the ac input power switches.
4. At the UACD stack 2 PDPX2, turn on the ac output power module (PM1, PM2, and PM3)
circuit breakers.
5. At the UACD stack 2 PDPX2 panel, turn on the –48 V BULK and –48 V TALK circuit break-
ers.
6. At the back of UACD stack 2, turn on the backup battery circuit breaker.
The ECCB is not used in the U.S.

>
7. Turn on the dc-to-dc shelf power supplies in the following order:
a) Shelf 1
8. At the UACD stack 2 PDPX2, turn on the power share circuit breaker.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch13.fm
Starting the System
Turning On Cabinet 1 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4500
13.6 Turning On Cabinet 1 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4500
WARNING
To turn on cabinet 1 of a dc-powered HiPath 4500:
1. At the dc system switchboard, turn on the branch circuit breaker for the dc branch circuit
serving cabinet 1 and remove the tag.
2. At the back of cabinet 1 (under the CCDAX shelf), turn on the main circuit breaker (see
3. At the front of UDCD stack 1 ICBP, turn on the PMOD power switches (see Figure 13-1 on
page 13-6).
4. Turn on the cabinet 1 dc-to-dc shelf power supplies in the following order:
a) Shelf 1 (CCDAX shelf, cabinet 1)
b) Remaining dc-to-dc shelf modules
5. At the front of UDCD cabinet 1 stack 1 ODP (Figure 13-3), turn on the
–48 V TALK circuit breaker.
Figure 13-1 ICBP
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch13.fm
Starting the System
+48 V
–48 V
Ground wire
Main circuit To base unit assembly
breaker
Figure 13-2 Main Circuit Breaker, HiPath 4500, Back View
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch13.fm
Starting the System

1. At the dc system switchboard, turn off and tag off the circuit breaker for cabinet 2.
2. At the back of the cabinet 2 (under the CCDAX shelf), turn on the main circuit breaker (see
3. At the UDCD cabinet 1 stack 2 ICBP, turn on the PMOD power switches (see Figure 13-1
on page 13-6).
4. At the UDCD cabinet 1 stack 2 ODP, turn on the –48 V BULK circuit breakers (see Figure
13-3 on page 13-8).
Figure 13-3 Output Distribution Panel, Front View
In cabinet 2 of the HiPath 4500, turn on all the dc-to-dc shelf power supplies in the following
order:
a) Shelf 1, (CCDAX shelf, cabinet 2)
5. At the UDCD cabinet 1stack 2 ODP, turn on the –48 V TALK circuit breaker (see Figure 13-
3 on page 13-8).
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch13.fm
Starting the System

2. At the back of cabinet 3 (under the CCDAX shelf), turn on the main circuit breaker.
3. At the front of the UDCD cabinet 2 stack 1 ICBP, turn on the PMOD power switches.
4. In cabinet 3 of the HiPath 4500, turn on the dc-to-dc shelf power supplies in the following
order:
a) Shelf 1 (CCDAX shelf, cabinet 1)
5. At the front of UDCD cabinet 2 stack 1 ODP turn on the –48 V TALK circuit breaker.

2. At the back of cabinet 4 (under the CCDAX shelf), turn on the main circuit breaker.
3. At the UDCD cabinet 2 stack 2 ICBP, turn on the PMOD power switches.
4. At the UDCD cabinet 2 stack 2 ODP, turn on the –48 V BULK circuit breakers.
5. In cabinet 4 of the HiPath 4500, turn on all the dc-to-dc shelf power supplies in the following
order:
a) Shelf 1, (CCDAX shelf, cabinet 1)
6. At the UDCD cabinet 2 stack 2 ODP, turn on the –48 V TALK circuit breaker (see Figure
13-3 on page 13-8).
13.10 Installing PROCOMM PLUS
This procedure supplements, does not replace, the installation instructions that are
> shipped with the PROCOMM PLUS package.
To install PROCOMM PLUS onto the C drive of your laptop by first using the installation instruc-
tions that are shipped with the PROCOMM PLUS package and then perform the following pro-
cedure.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch13.fm
Starting the System
Enabling Clock Batteries on the DSCX and DPC5 Boards
1. Insert the Siemens PCPLUS keymap diskette into drive A.

2. At the DOS prompt, type
copy a:\pcplus.kbd c:\pcplus
and press enter.
13.11 Enabling Clock Batteries on the DSCX and DPC5 Boards

The battery backup ensures that the power supply to the system clock is retained in the event
of a power failure, guaranteeing accurate timing for up to 48 hours.
Attention: Static Sensitive Devices

4 Observe all precautions for prevention of electrostatic discharge (ESD). Failure to
follow ESD prevention procedures can result in permanent or intermittent board fail-
ures.
Clock batteries are found in the DSCX and DPC5 boards. In new HiPath 4500 installations, the
battery on the DSCX and DPC5 boards are already enabled.
Figure 13-4 on page 13-10 shows the DSCX board jumpers.
Figure 13-4 DSCX Board Jumpers
13.12 Setting the Date and Time

The system time is needed for all central messages and is output to all digital terminals. Set the
current date and time using the AMO DATE.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch13.fm
Starting the System
Installing the Customer Database
Expect a time delay until the digital terminals have accepted the change (time/date).
> The change (time/date) is only implemented on the attendant console when you re-
move and then reinsert the handset cord.
If the lithium battery on the DSCX board are fully charged, the clock continues to function for
up to 48 hours after a power failure.
13.13 Installing the Customer Database

To install the customer HD, use either the:
● Complete customer database from the HD or
● Generate the customer database on-site
The database is generated in two ways:
– Factory-generated hard disk
– Site-generated database
13.13.1 Factory-Generated Database

In this scenario, the factory generates the customer database onto the hard disk and ships it
with the system. The service technician can start up the system immediately after it is installed.
Figure 13-5 shows a flowchart of a system startup from the hard disk.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch13.fm
Starting the System
Activate the system clock (connect battery)
Insert the HW dongle

The password is part of the
customer database
Switch on power
Check power modules

(LEDs)
Create empty database

with AMO DBC
The system is supplied
with a complete customer Insert MO containing
Create customer database HD. complete customer DB
with TAG and copy to HD
Generate system with TAP

(copy ACF to HD or MO)
Boot the system
Check ports, network access and

server connections.
Customer data backup

1. MO stored ext. by customer
2. MO in drive for backup
Figure 13-5 Startup Flowchart
13.13.2 Site-Generated Database

In this scenario, the system is only supplied with a test database. The service technician must
create the customer database before the system can be started up. This can be done on-site
or in the Customer Support Center (CSC). Figure 13-6 on page 13-13 shows a flowchart of gen-
erating the database on site.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch13.fm
Starting the System
1. Procedure - Checking 2. Procedure - Creating a

As-Unpacked Quality Customer-Specific Database
Test DB (without Record KONDA (e.g. in HUGT)

parametrization
of the modules)
Enter customer data + password

(e.g. with HUGT)
Perform startup
with the test data-
base Create customer-specific database
(ACF)
Delete
test DB
ACF transfer
- HOT
- ComWin
HiPath 4000
Customer Sys-
tem 3. Procedure - ACF Transfer
to the HiPath 4000 System
DB generation
Figure 13-6 Flowchart of an On-Site- or CSC-Generation of the Database
During HW updates, you must maintain the AMO TINFO. This AMO is used to man-
> age the technical data required for the configuration and upgrade of a system. The
AMO TINFO also has a notepad function which you can use for making additional
entries.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch13.fm
Starting the System
Starting the System
13.14 Starting the System

When you start the HiPath 4500 system, use the SSDs or LEDs to identify the different load
states that are reached. These displays can help you check the PABX start up errors, if any.
When importing systems into non-European (EU) countries, customs regulations

> stipulates that the system must not be operable when imported. To do this, connect
the SCSI-ADDRESS jumper of the HD to a value other than 0.
In countries such as AFTA countries, India or the People’s Republic of China, the
MOD must copied to the HD after delivery of the system.
Caution
7 If the system is brought into the equipment room from a cold environment, conden-
sation may occur. Wait until the system temperature is balanced and the system is
completely dry before starting it up.
To perform a startup:
1. Ensure that the plug has been ECOS-tested for safety purposes.
2. Ensure that the LPC80 and PSUPs are off.
3. Plug the LPC80 power plug into the base unit assembly (BUA) that is located underneath
the CC80F cabinet.
4. Turn on the LPC80 (-48V).
5. Activate all LPC80s first and then activate all PSUPs.
6. If a customer HD is not available, insert the MO disk containing the customer database in
the MO disk drive.
If a complete customer HD is available, replace the test database on the system with the
customer HD database and restart the system.
7. If the system is being started from the MO disk with the test database, initiate the startup
of the HiPath 4500 by pressing the LCT key on the DSCX board.
If the system is being started from the hard disk drive, the system starts up as soon as it
is turned on.
8. Check the progress of the startup by checking the SSD on the DSCX board (refer to Table
13-2 on page 13-15).
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch13.fm
Starting the System
Connecting to the TAP, I.M.
Operating Status Explanation
ADP is started up
SWU is started up
Table 13-2 DSCX, 7-Segment Display
13.15 Connecting to the TAP, I.M.
In I.M., TAP is used to identify the laptop of the service technician.

>
Figure 13-7 shows the connection locations for the TAP.
1 = Power supply
2 = SCSI port
3 = V.24 port
1 2 3 4 4 = Printer port
Figure 13-7 TAP Connections
To connect to the TAP (see Figure 13-8):

1. Connect the HW dongle (1) to the V.24 port of the TAP (in the U.S., COM1 or COM2 port).
2. Connect the other end of the V.24 HW dongle cable (2) to the V.24 port of the DSCX board.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch13.fm
Starting the System
Connecting to the TAP, I.M.
2
1
Figure 13-8 HW Dongle with V.24 Connection Cable
The cable used in this illustration is used in I.M. and Europe.

>
3. Set the synchronous/asynchronous switch on the DSCX board to asynchronous mode.
4. If you want to connect to a MO drive, attach a SCSI bus cable between the SCSI port of
the MO drive (refer the Figure 13-9 on page 13-17 for connector locations on the DSCX
board).
5. Connect the power cable of the TAP to an ac outlet.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch13.fm
Starting the System
Running the Dongle Code Word
7-Segment display
RUN
RESET key
ACT BUSY
LCT key LCT
NAL UAL
LAN interface
V.24 port
(sync.async) LAN function LED
V.24 switch (SYNC/ASYNC)

(synch.=HTS/asynch.=TAP)
SCSI port for TAP
Figure 13-9 DSCX Board Front Panel
13.16 Running the Dongle Code Word

To run the dongle code word, use AMO CODEW.
13.16.1 Checking the Ring Generator
If the ANATE telephone does not ring, check the ring generator.
>
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002
montbuch13.fm
Starting the System
Replacing the Covers
Ensure that the ring generator is jumpered for 85V, 20 HZ before powering on the system. To
check this setting:
2. Unscrew the screw that holds the ring generator in place.
3. Remove the ring generator.
4. On the backside of the ring generator, find a black plastic flap.
5. Check the setting.
6. Refer to the diagram on the ring generator for additional information.
13.17 Replacing the Covers
maintenance.
Replace the individual covers when the system has been fully mounted, cabled, and put into
operation. The covers are replaced in the reverse order to the order in which they were re-
moved.
1. Replace the covers starting with the lower cabinets.
2. Lock the top cover by turning the quick-release 90° to the left or right (1) until the covers
are firmly secured.
The covers are secure when you hear a click as you shut the cover. The cover
7 may fall off if it is not locked into place.
3. Install the cover to the cable channel (see Figure 13-10 on page 13-19).
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch13.fm
Starting the System
Cable channel covers
Figure 13-10 Installing the Cable Channel Covers
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch13.fm
Starting the System
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
Verifying the System
14 Verifying the System

This chapter describes the tests and procedures used to verify the operation of the system.
14.1 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

14.2 Checking the Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.3 Checking the Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.4 Verifying the AC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14.5 Testing the Maintenance Terminal for the Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
14.6 Checking and Testing the Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
14.7 Testing the Restart and Failure Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
14.8 Backing up the Customer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
14.9 Setting and Activating the HTS Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
14.10 Verifying the Ring Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
14.11 Verifying the Station-to-MDF Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
14.12 Verifying Transmission Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
14.12.1 Balancing Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
14.12.2 Choosing the Balance Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
14.12.3 Selecting the Balance Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
14.12.4 Verifying ISDN Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
14.12.5 Verifying T1 Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
14.12.6 Recording Circuit IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
14.13 Verifying the MO-Disk Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
14.14 Verifying the Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
14.15 Verifying the Operation of System Features and Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
14.15.1 HG 3800 Routing Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
14.15.2 Testing CDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
14.15.3 Testing Least-Cost Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23
14.15.4 Testing PhoneMail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25
14.16 Verifying the System Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25
14.17 Customer Training, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
Tools Required
14.1 Tools Required
maintenance.
Use the following tools to perform the system verification procedures in this chapter:
● Maintenance telephone with a direct inward dialing (DID) number and direct trunk select
capability enabled
● Telephone test set, P/N 66E3472 or 66E3924
● Transmission measuring test set (TMS) with singing return loss (SRL) and echo return loss
(ERL) capability (SAGE 930A with options 01 and 10C), P/N 66E4280
Perform the installation and testing procedures using the Hicom One Tool (HOT) or
> ComWin (for a more detailed description of these procedures refer to the Online
Help for the Hicom One Tool).
14.2 Checking the Boards

To check the status of the peripheral boards, use the selected software (such as ComWin, in
Europe). Peripheral boards are used in the line termination unit (such as SLMA, TMAU, RG,
and LTUCX boards).
14.3 Checking the Cables

To check the allocation of the generated subscriber positions to the extensions, test the trunks,
tie-lines, and special equipment to ensure that they are functioning correctly.
1. Set up a tie-line (incoming/outgoing) and then initiate a consultation call.
Forward the call.
2. Set up a trunk (incoming/outgoing) and then initiate a consultation call.
Forward the call.
3. Check the line statuses using the TAP (analog circuits, digital circuits and special circuits):
4. Ensure that the connected lines are in the READY state.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
Verifying the AC4
14.4 Verifying the AC4

To verify the AC4:
1. Unplug the handset jack and press the Check Memory key. The test mode screen appears
(see Figure 14-1).
TEST MODE
1 LED TEST
2 KEYBOARD TEST
3 INTERNAL TEST RESULTS
4 FIRMWARE AND HARDWARE ISSUES
5 GENERAL
6 TEST PATTERN 1 (RASTER 1)
7 TEST PATTERN 2 (RASTER 2)
8 TEST PATTERN 3 (CHARACTER SET)
9 SYSTEM MESSAGE TRACER
* AUDIBLE ALER ON/OFF # PITCH ADJUST
0 EXIT TEST MODE
Figure 14-1 Test Mode Screen
2. Press 1 LED TEST to test the LEDs. The LEDs light up simultaneously for a brief period,
then turn off. Each LED then lights up, sequentially progressing from left to right, starting
from the top row to the bottom of the keyboard.
When the LED test is finished, the TEST MODE menu appears.
3. Press 2 KEYBOARD TEST to test the keyboard,.
4. Press 3 INTERNAL TEST RESULTS to display the hardware errors when the components
of the AC4 are test.
5. Press 4 FIRMWARE AND HARDWARE ISSUES to display the hardware and firmware
identification, version number, and revision level of the AC4
6. Press 5 GENERAL to perform the GENERAL test as follows:.
5 GENERAL test mode is unique (see Figure 14-2 on page 14-4).

>
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
Verifying the AC4
a) Plug the jack into the keyboard receptacle to set the AC4 into standby mode.
GENERAL
1 OFF
2 OFF
3 OFF
4 OFF
5 OFF
6 OFF
7 OFF
8 OFF
0 EXIT TEST MODE
Figure 14-2 GENERAL Test Mode Screen
b) Pressing 1 OFF through 8 OFF allows you to toggle between ON and OFF. 1 through
6 are features specifically used for the Braille console (maintenance terminal for the
blind).
Table 14-1 lists the functions of the GENERAL test mode.
GENERAL Test Item Function

1 OFF Tests the automatic display of trunk group when trunk calls are an-
swered
2 OFF Tests the automatic display of trunk group when calls are answered
3 OFF Tests the call status line
4 OFF Tests the texts in small print
5 OFF Tests the automatic display in line in case of a recall
6 OFF Tests the automatic display in line 1 in case of a recall
7 OFF Tests the automatic start of a tape recorder when trunks calls are
answered
8 OFF Tests the automatic start of a tape recorder when trunk calls, regu-
lar calls, and private calls are answered.
Table 14-1 General Test Mode Functions
7. Press 6 TEST PATTERN 1 (RASTER1) to check that the lines on the screen are straight
and evenly spaced. This test displays a grid pattern.
8. Press 7 TEST PATTERN 2 (RASTER2) to check the focus on the AC4 screen. This test
displays a fine dot pattern.
9. Press 8 TEST PATTERN 3 (RASTER 3) to locate faulty keys. This test displays the com-
plete AC4 character set (including symbols).
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
Testing the Maintenance Terminal for the Blind
10. Press 9 TEST MESSAGE CENTER to locate faults in the AC4. This test displays the sys-
tem messages (including symbols).
11. Press * AUDIBLE ALER ON/OFF # PITCH ADJUST to test the ring tone and ring pitch as
follows:
a) Press *. A continuous ring tone is heard.
b) Press * again. The ring tone is terminated.
c) Press #. A 3-second burst of ring pitch is heard.
d) Press # again. A 3-second burst of ring pitch at another pitch level is heard.
There are nine possible distinct ring pitches. Each time # is pressed, a different
> ring pitch is heard.
e) Exit from the ring pitch test by pressing 0.

f) Press 0 to exit the menu.
14.5 Testing the Maintenance Terminal for the Blind

To test the maintenance terminal for the blind:
1. Press the Back key and Line 12 together twice. Different test patterns appear on the screen
when you press various keys on the Braille displays (refer to Table 14-2).
Keystroke Display
Line 1 All pins are down, with the exception of module M1-pin S1, M2-
S2, M3-S3, M4-S7, M5-S4, M6-S5, M7-S6, M8-S8.
The result is a regular pattern.
Line 2 Same display as above for module 9 to module 16
Line 6 Same display as above for module 41, 42
Line 7 to Line 12 Displays are inverted.
All pins are raised, with the exception of the above.
Return All pins are down.
Continue All pins are raised
Table 14-2 Maintenance Terminal Test Displays (Sheet 1 of 2)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
Checking and Testing the Features
Keystroke Display
Status Software status is displayed
ON/OFF (press All pins alternate between up and down, approximately every
for approximately four seconds, until you press another key.
five seconds)
Table 14-2 Maintenance Terminal Test Displays (Sheet 2 of 2)
The displays for Line 1 to Line 12 indicate a possible failure on the driver board and in the con-
trol line of the Braille display. If, for example, the same pin is up in two modules, then the module
lines have short-circuited.
The Next, Back, and ON/OFF displays can be used to test the Braille display.
2. After you have completed the internal check mode, test the following calls:
● Make a trunk, tie-trunk, and in-house call
● Activate the night service
● Ask somebody to call you using a trunk and in-house, then forward the calls
3. Refer to the AC4 Operating Instructions for additional information.
14.6 Checking and Testing the Features

To check the available features using the TAP and ensure that they are functioning correctly,
refer to the operating instructions for the terminals and attendant console.
A list of abbreviations can be found in the HiPath 4000 service manual under the AMO descrip-
tion FEASU.
14.7 Testing the Restart and Failure Transfer Function

Test the restart behavior and the failure transfer function of the system using the TAP.
1. Test soft restart
2. Test hard restart.
To test the failure transfer function of the system (only with an analog trunk):
1. Switch off the main power supply to the system.
2. Test the failure transfer function on the relevant customer device.
– Is there a dial tone from the exchange?
– Is it possible to dial the exchange?
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
Backing up the Customer Data
In the event of a power failure on the system, an analog trunk is switched on an analog
device by means of a drop out relay.
3. After the test is complete, switch on the power to the system again (reload) and wait until
it has started up.
14.8 Backing up the Customer Data

In order to be able to create a customer-specific hard disk as quickly as possible in the event
of a hard disk failure, you must back up the PS program system for every customer.
HiPath 4500 systems without an MO drive, the program system (ACF) is backed up
> in the Flash Memory (“:M:” drive).
14.9 Setting and Activating the HTS Function

With PABX Teleservice, service activities (for example, system maintenance, troubleshooting,
and universal services) can be performed by means of the telephone network. This facility al-
lows the product specialist to provide support remotely.
PABX Teleservice offers the following features:
● Remote maintenance
● Automatic fault reporting
● Software patches
The system has a standard HTS function. If the customer needs to use a HTS function:
1. Make the necessary hardware and software settings on the system (refer to the SHB de-
scription “Hicom Teleservice HTS”).
2. Connect the modem for HTS to the V.24 port of the DSCX module
3. Set the V.24 switch to synchronous
4. Set up the extension for HTS (extract from database)
5. Once you have made the required settings, activate and check the Teleservice function us-
ing the TAP.
6. Inform your control center about the new customer and initiate dial-up from the HTS con-
sole.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
Verifying the Ring Generator
14.10 Verifying the Ring Generator
DANGER
1 Be extremely careful when working with the ring generator. High voltages are
present at the ring generator.
To verify the ring generator, connect an anate to an SLMA port and dial the anate. If the anate
rings like the normal U.S. cadence, it is functioning properly.
14.11 Verifying the Station-to-MDF Connections

If the MDF cabling is performed by a subcontractor, verify and document all work as follows:
1. Check on the progress of the subcontractor’s work.
2. Issue or implement change orders to the subcontractor as needed.
3. Walk through the site to verify that the cabling has been completed according to guidelines,
and either accept the work or write a list of the corrections to be made.
14.12 Verifying Transmission Facilities

This section describes the procedures used to verify CO and DID trunks, ISDN and T1 spans,
and OPS lines and trunks.
14.12.1 Balancing Networks

To ensure optimum transmission performance, the TMC16, TMDID, and SLMA3 channels must
be configured to the balance network that provides the best return loss (ERL and SRL). The
balance network is configured by means of COFIDX field in the Direct AMO Dialog fast-path
code (command) CHATCSU for TMDID, TMC16, and the NWBALNO field in command
CHASCSU for OPS. A default value of 3 provides adequate performance for most trunk facili-
ties, and OPS lines usually perform adequately with a default value of 2.
14.12.2 Choosing the Balance Network

For locally used trunks, the best balance network choice provides the highest ERL value that
is equal to or greater than 10 dB, and an SRL low and SRL high that are equal to or greater
than 10 dB. connotations
For facilities that are utilized within complex networks the best balance choice provides the
highest ERL value that is equal to or greater than 18 dB and an SRL low and high that are equal
to or greater than 10 dB.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
Verifying Transmission Facilities
Do not select a balance network if the measured ERL value is less than either of the
> measured SRL values.
Table 14-3 shows various sample return loss measurements. In this example the best choice
balance network would be network 3. Network 2 and 5 are acceptable for local trunks. Network
4 is not acceptable.
Network ERL (dB) SRL Low (dB) SRL High (dB)

2 13.7 10.2 11.0
3 18.6 13.2 14.5
4 6.2 5.7 6.1
5 15.7 14.1 14.3
Table 14-3 Return Loss Measurement Examples
14.12.3 Selecting the Balance Network
Caution
7 Use this method only when more than one balance network meets the minimum cri-
teria set previously in Section 14.12.2 on page 14-8. Do not include balance net-
works if the measurements fall below any of the minimum level requirements.
If a trunk only meets or exceeds the minimum requirements on one balance network,
then select that balance network but do not use this method.
To select a balance network:
1. Select a trunk.
2. Take the ERL and SRL measurements for all four networks on the selected trunk.
Compare the four network measurements in each category.

>
3. Assign a quality factor rank (Q number 1 to 4) number, with 4 being the best return loss
measurement. Ignore the trunk if any measurement falls below minimum requirements.
4. List the Q number for each balance network. Select the higher Q number total.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
In the event that two trunks have the same Q number total, select the network with the high-
est ERL measurement. If both trunks have the same ERL measurement, select the net-
work with the highest SRL low measurement followed by the highest SRL high measure-
ment.
Network 3 (Table 14-4) shows an example of the best trunk balance network using the Q
number method.
Network ERL (dB) ERL Q SRL Low SRL Low SRL High SRL High Q Num-
Number (dB) Q Num- (dB) Q Num- ber Total
ber ber
2 13.7 2 10.2 2 11.0 2 6
3 18.6 4 13.2 3 12.5 4 11
4 6.2 5.7 6.1
5 15.7 3 14.1 4 14.3 3 10
Table 14-4 Return Loss Measurement Examples
14.12.3.1 Balancing CO Trunks

To determine the best central office (CO) trunk configuration, perform the following:
1. Set the balance network in the trunk configuration to 2 as follows:
a) Type the command CHA-TCSU and press Enter.
b) Type the following field values and press Enter after each.
Field Value
PEN1 <LTG-LTU-SLOT-CIRCUIT>
DEV <GRDSTR or LPSTR>
COFIDX 2
The angle brackets (< >) indicate fields that require trunk specific information.
>
2. Activate the CO line to load the new balance network as follows:
a) Type the command ACT-DSSU and press Enter.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
TYPE PEN
3. Disconnect the maintenance telephone from the MDF block.
4. Connect the transmission test set to the maintenance telephone port (Figure 14-3).
-2.5 dBm 4
HiPath 4000 2
SLMA3 T
or ATI
R
3 6
TMC16 T
5
R 1
40000126ger
1 - Bridge clips
2 - MDF
3 - Demarc
4 - TMS
5 - Central office
6 - Maintenance telephone
Figure 14-3 Test Setup for Measuring ERL and SRL on CO Trunk Channels
5. Verify that the TMS is in termination mode with 600-Ohm impedance.

6. Direct select the trunk under test by dialing # # 8 x x x.
7. Listen for CO dial tone. If you cannot get dial tone, ensure that it is not in use, and then
perform the CO trunk signaling tests.
8. Dial the silent termination number of the facility provider.
9. Measure and note the ERL and SRL (low and high) values.
10. Repeat steps 1 through 9 of this procedure for balance network configurations 3, 4, and 5.
n step 1, change COFIDX=2 in the command line to the correct balance network
> configuration number.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
11. Configure the balance network in the trunk configuration that provided the best ERL and
SRL values.
14.12.3.2 Balancing DID Trunks

To determine the best DID trunk configuration:
1. Set the balance network in the trunk configuration to 2, as follows:
a) Type the command CHA-TCSU and press Enter.
b) Type the following field values and press Enter.
Field Value
PEN <LTG-LTU-SLOT-CIRCUIT>
DEV DID
COFIDX 2
2. Activate the DID line to load the new balance network as follows:
Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
TYPE PEN
Steps 3 through 7 are not applicable to systems with hardware and symptom di-
> agnosis (HSD).

4. Connect the TMS to the maintenance telephone port (Figure 14-4 on page 14-13).
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
-2.5 dBm
4
HiPath 4000 2
T
Analog
board R
3 6
TMDID T
5
board R
1
40000127ger
1 - Bridge clips
2 - MDF
3 - Demarc
4 - TMS
5 - Central office
Figure 14-4 Test Setup for Measuring ERL and SRL on DID Trunk Channels
5. Ensure that the TMS is in terminated mode with 600-Ohm impedance.

6. Have the facility provider seize the DID trunk under test and then terminate it with silent
termination.
7. Using the TMS, measure and note the value of the ERL and the SRL.
8. Repeat steps 1 though 7 for balance network configurations with the COFIDX set to 3, 4,
and 5.
9. Configure the balance network in the trunk configuration that provided the best ERL and
SRL values.
14.12.3.3 Balancing OPS Lines and Trunks

To determine the best OPS line configuration, perform the following:
1. Set the balance network in the trunk configuration to 1 as follows:
a) Type the command CHA-SCSU and press Enter.
Field Value
STNO <OPS Extension #>
DEVFUNC ANATE
COFIDX 5
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
2. Activate the OPS line to load the new balance network as follows:
Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
TYPE STNO
STNO <OPS extension #
4. Connect the TMS to the maintenance telephone port (Figure 14-5).
HiPath 4000 1 1
T 3 T 7
Analog
board R R
-2.5 dBm
4 5
Analog T 6
board R
40000128ger
1 - Demarc
2 - Bridge clips
3 - Transmission facilities
4 - MDF
5 - TMS
7 - Distant-end OPS telephone
Figure 14-5 Test Setup for Measuring ERL and SRL on OPS Lines
5. Ensure the TMS is in the terminated mode with 600-Ohm impedance.

6. Call the OPS telephone.
7. Have the distant-end take the OPS telephone off-hook.
8. Measure and note the ERL and SRL (low and high) values.
9. Repeat steps 1 through 8 for OPS line configurations for balance network configurations 2,
3, and 4.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
10. Configure the balance network in the line configuration that provided the best ERL and
SRL values.
14.12.4 Verifying ISDN Spans

Verify the functionality of the D channel of the ISDN span as follows:
1. Ensure that the local continuity and the end-to-end link tests have been performed.
2. Ensure that personnel on the far end of the ISDN span have been assigned to perform this
verification procedure with you.
3. Activate the TMDNH board as follows:
a) Type the command ACT-BSSU and press Enter.
Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
LTG <LTG>
LTU <LTU>
SLOT <SLOT>
4. Activate the D channel of the ISDN span as follows:
Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
PEN <PEN of the D CHANNEL>
5. Activate all the bearer channels of the ISDN span as follows:
Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
PEN <PEN1><PEN2>
The D channel becomes operational within 15 seconds.
If the D channel is not operational within 15 seconds after activation, check the configura-
tion for the different types of applications in Table 14-5 on page 14-16 through Table 14-8
on page 14-17.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
Record the device type and bipolar eight substitution information

>
BCSU Parameters If the near end is The far end should be
Timing type (TIMTYP) SYST LOOP
Frame (FRAME) STD STD
Bipolar eight substitution YES YES
(BI8SUB)
Bipolar violation detection YES YES
Network or user emulation NETWK USER NETWK
(NETUSR)
Table 14-5 BCSU Configuration Checks for CorNet Trunks
TCSU Parameters If the near end is The far end should be

Device type (DEV) S1D S1D
S1B S1B
Table 14-6 TCSU Configuration Checks for CorNet Trunks
BCSU Parameters Near End

Timing type (TIMTYP) LOOP
Frame (FRAME) <STD or ESF> (Must be the same as the far-end configura-
tion.)
If the frame = ESF, check the bipolar eight substitution
(BI8SUB) value.
BI8SUB <NO or YES> (Must be the same as the far-end configura-
tion.)
Bipolar violation detection <NO or YES> (Must be the same as the far-end configura-
tion.)
Network or user emulation (NE- USER
TUSR)
Table 14-7 BCSU Configuration Checks for AT&T, MCI, and SPRINT ISDN Trunks
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
TCSU Parameters Far End

Protocol (PROTOCOL) <ATT49, ATT59 or MCI for SPRINT and MCI2 for MCI>
(Must be the same as the far-end configuration).
Table 14-8 TCSU Configuration Checks for AT&T, MCI, and SPRINT ISDN Trunks
If all of the configurations are correct and the D channel is still not operational, con-
> tact your next level of support.
14.12.5 Verifying T1 Spans

To verify T1 spans:
1. Activate the TMD24 board as follows:
a) Type the command ACT-BSSU and press Enter.
Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
TYPE PEN
PEN1 <PEN1>
PEN2 <PEN2>
2. Activate all the channels of the span as follows:
Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
TYPE <PEN>
PEN1 <PEN1>
PEN <PEN2>
3. Ensure that the local continuity and the end-to-end link tests have been performed.
4. Perform a bit error rate test (BERT). Should the BERT fail, contact your local provider.
5. Display the current link error count of the T1 span as follows:
Type the command DIS-BSSU and press Enter. Perform this several times.
Field Value
LTG 1
LTU <LTU>
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002
montbuch14.fm
Verifying the MO-Disk Drive
SLOT <SLOT>
CCTNO <blank>
DIS-TYPE <blank>
RESET <blank>
After 15 seconds, the T1 span enters the green alarm state and the following errors stop
increasing:
● Bipolar error seconds (BES)
● Out-of-frame error seconds (OES)
● Up slips (US)
● Down slips (DS)
● Error seconds (ES)
● Frame slips (FS)
If the T1 span enters the green alarm state but the errors are increasing, perform a BERT.
14.12.6 Recording Circuit IDs

Record circuit IDs in the Jack and Pin Record Data Sheet of the Siemens 9751 CBX and 9200
CBX System Site Log.
14.13 Verifying the MO-Disk Drive

Verify the operation of the MO-disk drive by checking its status as follows:
1. Type DIS-DSSM and press Enter.
2. Type the following values, then press Enter.
Field Value
UNIT A1
TYPE C
CNO 6
14.14 Verifying the Hard Disk

Verify the hard disk as follows:
1. Check the status of the hard disk drive as follows:
a) Type DIS-DSKST and press Enter.
b) Enter the following values and press Enter after each:
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
Verifying the Operation of System Features and Servers
Field Value
UNIT <A1, V1, T1>
TYPE C
CNO <1 - 8>
The screen displays IN SERVICE.
2. If the drive is not ready, repeat steps 1a and 1b, and proceed to the following steps:
a) Enter the command ACT-DSKX and press Enter.
b) Enter the following values and press Enter after each:
Field Value
UNIT <A1, V1, T1>
CNO <1 - 8>
3. If the hard disk does not activate, perform steps 5 through 10 of Section 14.13 on page
14-18.
14.15 Verifying the Operation of System Features and Servers

This section provides test procedures to verify the operation of the Hicom 300 H system fea-
tures and servers.
14.15.1 HG 3800 Routing Tests

Test automatic call distribution (HG 3800) after all of the DID, wide area telephone service
(WATS), T1 or any other incoming trunks that may receive HG 3800 calls have been cut over
and tested.
Verify that the announcement and recording devices are functional before testing.
14.15.1.1 HG 3800 Internal Server Tests

Perform the HG 3800 Server internal routing test as follows:
1. Print a hardcopy of the following information by entering the corresponding commands one
at a time (Table 14-9).
command Command Parameters to Information to Retrieve

Set
DIS-ACDSD MSG Agent and supervisor messages
DIS-ACDGP Non-PhoneMail HG 3800 Server group config-
uration
Table 14-9 HG 3800 Server Reports to Retrieve(Sheet 1 of 2)
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
command Command Parameters to Information to Retrieve

Set
DIS-AGENT Agent login IDs
DIS-ACDRS ART day shift information
DIS-ACDRCG Route control group (RCG) route selection
DIS-DNIT Internal routing directory number (INTRDN)
DIS-ACDRT HG 3800 Server routing tables (ART)
DIS-RCSU HG 3800 Server recorder and music sources
DIS-DPLN HG 3800 Server feature access codes
DIS-TGACC HG 3800 Server thresholds
Table 14-9 HG 3800 Server Reports to Retrieve(Sheet 2 of 2)
2. Select an HG 3800 Server group from the Non-PhoneMail HG 3800 Server Group Config-
uration printout.
3. Look at the Agent Login IDs printout for agents who belong to the HG 3800 Server group
in step 2 and select an agent ID.
4. Log in with the Agent ID selected in step 3 by dialing the agent login access code (from the
HG 3800 Server feature access code printout) and the agent ID.
5. Dial the “agent available” access code to place the telephone in AVAILABLE state. (Refer
to the HG 3800 Server feature access codes report for the available state [HG 3800 Serv-
erAVL] access codes.)
6. Leave all other agents logged off.
7. Determine the internal routing number that will connect you with the HG 3800 Server agent
selected in step 3, as follows:
a) Review the HG 3800 Server routing tables (ART) and select one that routes the calls
to your HG 3800 Server group in ART step 1.
b) Refer to the ART Day Shift Information report for a day shift number (DSNUM) that
uses the ART.
c) Look at the Route Control Group (RCG) Route Selection report for a route control
group that uses the DSNUM in step 7b.
d) Refer to the Internal Routing Directory Number (INTRDN) report for the INTRDN num-
ber associated with the RCG in step 7c.
8. From the maintenance telephone, dial the INTRDN in step 7d.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
9. Ensure that the agent who was logged on in step 4 received the call. (If this test is being
performed during off-hours, use the command CHA-DATE to change the system date and
time to comply with the shift schedule found in the ART Day Shift Information report.)
10. Place the same agent in the UNAVAILABLE state and make the test call again.
11. Verify that the call goes into queue and is routed according to the ART that was selected
in step 7a by getting into the current status display menu of CCMS and getting the status
for the group that the agent is logged on to.
12. Verify that the call waiting lamps are functioning according to the Non-PhoneMail HG 3800
Server Group Configuration report.
13. Repeat steps 3 through 12 for any additional HG 3800 Server groups.
14. Verify the agent (AGMSG) and supervisor (SPMSG) messages by reviewing the Agent and
Supervisor Messages report.
15. If the date and time were changed in step 9, reset these values to the correct date and time.
14.15.1.2 HG 3800 Server Trunk Tests

Using the HG 3800 Server threshold list, perform the HG 3800 Server trunk tests as follows:
1. Place the agent into the AVAILABLE state.
2. Test the incoming HG 3800 Server trunks by dialing the listed number.
3. Test WATS by dialing the plant test number (PTN) or by having someone from a remote
office call in. DID, dedicated foreign exchange (FX) and CO trunks are tested by simply di-
aling the number.
4. Test the incoming HG 3800 Server thresholds as follows:
These steps may require assistance from the facility provider.

>
a) Using the command CHA-TGACC set the HG 3800 Server THRH to 2 or to a low num-
ber that is easily tested.
b) Place three (ACDTHRH plus 1) simultaneous calls over the HG 3800 Server trunks.
c) The third call should receive an all-trunks-busy tone.
d) Reset the ACDTHRH to its original setting with the command CHATGACC.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
14.15.2 Testing CDR

Test the call detail recording (CDR) list output of the system as follows:
1. Print the following information by typing the commands shown in Table 14-10, one at a
time.
command Com- Information to Retrieve

mand
DIS-MSEL Operating condition, basic device (BASDEB), STNTBL1, and DNOTBL1
DIS-MLIST Station number
DIS-MFREQ DIALOGFIELD
Table 14-10 CDR Reports to Retrieve
2. From the DIS-MSEL printout, select a selection group that has OPERATION CONDITION
= ON.
3. If STNTBL1=N, and DNOTBL1=N, then all stations are valid for CDR. If STNTBL1=Y, and
DNOTBL1=Y, find valid stations for CDR from the command DIS-MLIST printout.
4. If BASDEV=DEV#, then the CDR must be sent to a printer or a terminal (depending on the
configured device on port 1 of the ADP).
5. Make an external call from any valid station. The CDR must be sent either to a printer or
to a terminal when the call is completed.
6. If BASDEV=CDRC1 or (CDRC2), then the CDR must be sent to a file. From the FCP DIS-
MFREQ printout, if at least one dialog field number exists, establish an external call from any
valid station.
7. Type the command DIS-MFREQ and then press Enter.
8. Type the field value DIAFNO=<dialog field #>, and then press Enter.
9. The CDR must be sent to a file.
10. From the command DIS-MFREQ printout, if the dialog fields are free, type the command
ADD-MFREQ and press Enter.
11. Type the following field values and press Enter
Field Value
TYPE L
DIAFNO 1
FILE CDRC1
FILESTA <YYMMDDHHmm>
FILEND <YYMMDDHHmm>
FORMFORM0 2
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
BLKSIZE 127
FOUT Y
STAT YYMMDDHHmm>
MULTOUT N
PERIOD 0
SELSTOP Y
12. Make an external call from any valid station.
13. Type the command OUT-MFREQ and press Enter.
14. Type the field value DIAFNO=<l> and then press Enter.
15. When the CDR test is complete, type the command DEL-MFREQ and press Enter.
16. Type the field value DIAFNO=<l> and then press Enter.
14.15.3 Testing Least-Cost Routing

Test the least-cost routing (LCR) configuration of the system after all of the outgoing trunks
have been cut over and tested as follows:
1. Print the reports in Table 14-11.
command Com- Parameters to Information to Retrieve

mand Set
DIS-LROUT Trunk group numbers and route numbers
DIS-LDPLN Dialing patterns and route numbers
DIS-LSCHD LCR schedule
DIS-LAORT Area code and office code restrictions
DIS-LCOS LCR classes of service
DIS-DPLN TYPE=STN ROLMnet dialing patterns and route numbers
DIS-TGACC PEN locations of trunk circuits
Table 14-11 LCR Reports to Retrieve
2. Select a dialing pattern from the Dialing Patterns and Route Numbers report.
3. Note the route number that is associated with the selected dialing pattern.
4. Note the first trunk group (route element) associated with the route number in the Trunk
Group Numbers and Route Numbers report.
5. Ensure that the trunk group is available to test as follows:
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
a) Check the LCR schedule report to ensure that the LCR schedule presently allows ac-
cess to the selected route element. (Look at the Trunk Group Numbers and Route
Numbers report and note the letters under the SCHEDULES field that have been
marked with an X. Use these letters as an input to the LCR schedule report.)
If the schedule blocks a call to that trunk group, change the system date and time to
comply with the schedule, by typing the command CHADATE.
b) Check for a READY status of the actual trunk circuits in that group by typing the com-
mand DIS-SDSU-TK with the PENs found in the PEN locations of the trunk circuits
report.
c) Check the AUTH field of the Trunk Group Numbers and Route Numbers report to en-
sure that the LCOS for the maintenance extension is high enough to use that route by
typing the command DIS-SCSU to find the LCOSV of the maintenance extension.
d) Check the AORT field of the Trunk Group Numbers and Route Numbers report to en-
sure that the test number does not contain an area code or office code that is blocked
for that route. Use the AORT index number from the Trunk Group Numbers and Route
Numbers report in the DIS-LAORT report to check this.
6. Dial a far-end test number that incorporates the selected dialing pattern. Ensure that the
call is complete.
7. Ensure that one of the trunks in the trunk group was seized by call processing, by typing
the command DIS-SDSU with the PENs found in the PEN Locations of Trunk Circuits re-
port. The initials CP should appear in the status field.
8. Deactivate the trunk group by typing the command DEADSSU with the PENs found in the
PEN Locations of Trunk Circuits report.
9. Repeat steps 4 through 8 with the remaining route elements (trunk group) in the route.
10. Repeat steps 3 through 9 with the remaining dialing patterns in the Dialing Patterns and
Route Numbers report.
11. Repeat steps 2 through 9 with a ROLMnet extension from each route found in the ROLM-
net Dialing Patterns and Route Numbers report.
12. If the date and time were changed in step 5a, reset them to their correct values.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
Verifying the System Bypass
14.15.4 Testing PhoneMail

Test PhoneMail as follows:
1. Determine the PEN locations of the Phonemail ports as follows:
a) Type the command DIS-SBCSU and press Enter.
Field Value
STNO blank>
TYPE PM
c) Note the systems response for LOCATION (PEN).
2. Display the status of the SLMS boards that support that the PhoneMail system as follows:
a) Type the command DIS-SDSU and press Enter.
Field Value
LINK <blank>
LTG 1
LTU <LTU of the first PEN in step 1>
SLOT <slot of the first PEN in step 1>
CCT <blank>
The system’s response on the last column of the screen should be READY or
> NOGEN. A response of NOGEN indicates a channel is not configured.
3. Repeat step 2 for all the PENs found in step 1.

4. Call a PhoneMail extension number and leave a message.
5. Wait for the LED on the extension to light.
6. Call the PhoneMail access number and retrieve the message.
14.16 Verifying the System Bypass

Verify the system bypass as follows:
1. Check the punch down sequence of the DSCX board.
2. Refer to the HiPath 4000 V1.0 Service Manual for the SSD information of the DSCX board
to check whether the system bypass is functioning properly.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch14.fm
Customer Training, I.M.
14.17 Customer Training, I.M.

Once the system is fully operational, the following basic training is to be provided for each sys-
tem.
● Basic introduction to the HiPath 4000 system for a person nominated by the customer.
● Explanation of the functionality and performance of the attendant console (operation of the
attendant console)
● Functionality of the Chese (Executive/Secretary service) in hard-coded and freely-pro-
grammable keys.
● Introduction to the digital console including the team function, which is available in hard-
coded and freely-programmable keys.
The customer is responsible for nominating the participants in the basic training. The number
of participants is limited to 2-4 persons.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch15.fm
Adding Cabinets to the System
15 Adding Cabinets to the System

This section describes procedures to add cabinets to the HiPath 4500.
15.1 Expansion Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

15.2 Connecting the Cabinet Stacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch15.fm
Expansion Configuration
15.1 Expansion Configuration
MDFHX6 MDFHX6 MDFHX6 MDFHX6 MDFHX6 MDFHX6
(UP..1) (UP..2) (UP..3) (UP..4) (UP..5) (UP..6)
UP.. 3 UP.. 7 UP.. 11 UP.. 15
UP.. 2 UP.. 6 UP.. 10 UP.. 14
UACD 2 UP.. 1 UP.. 5 UP.. 9 UP.. 13
UACD 1 UCD UP.. 4 UP.. 8 UP.. 12
Power box Stack 1 Stack 2 Stack 3 Stack 4
Figure 15-1 HiPath 4500 Expansion Maximum Expansion Configuration to the MDFHX6
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch15.fm
Expansion Configuration
The expansion cabinets in a multiple-cabinet system (maximum four cabinets) are on top of the
basic (CC80F) cabinet. The expansion cabinets are secured together using quick-release locks
on the front.
To expand the system:
1. Release the cabinet by turning the quick-release locks 90° to the left or right (see Figure
15-2 on page 15-4).
2. Lift the housing cover off the base cabinet.
The housing cover and backplane are also secured in the same manner as the
> expansion cabinets. This allows components to be removed individually after the
quick-release locks have been released.
3.
Caution
7 The connecting screws between the individual cabinets are not used for internal
grounding purposes.
4. Mount the expansion cabinet on top of the existing expansion cabinet.

5. Secure with screws.
6. Refer to the hardware to connect the telephony cables.
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

montbuch15.fm
Connecting the Cabinet Stacks
Figure 15-2 Removing System Components
15.2 Connecting the Cabinet Stacks

To connect the cabinet stacks, refer to Section 6.2.2, “Installing the Ground Straps Between
Cabinets”
P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002


Hipath 4000 Hipath 4500: Initial Installation/Startup

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hipath 4000 Hipath 4500: Initial Installation/Startup

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

s

The device conforms to the EU guideline 1999/5/EG, as attested by the CE

Subject to availability. Right of modification reserved.

1 Important Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

2.4.1 Administrative Data Processor (ADP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

5.4 Free-Standing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

7.14 Connecting the Power Box to the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

10.1.10 Powering On the AC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

11.3.5 Installing the HG 3800 Controller Rack Mount Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

13.15 Connecting to the TAP, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

Revision Number Date Summary

P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

1.1 Safety Information

P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

1.2 Special Notices

IEC 60332-1 EN 50265-1 and VDE 0482 Part 265-1 and

P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

1.2.1 Safety Information: Danger

P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

1.2.2 Safety Information: Warning

1.2.3 Safety Information: Caution

P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

1.2.4 General Information

P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

1.2.5 Behavior in Emergencies

1.2.6 Accident Reporting

P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

1.3 Data Protection and Data

P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

1.4 UL and CSA Standards, U.S. and Canada

Product UL 60950, CSA C22.2, No. 60950.00

1.4.1 UL 60960 and CSA C22.2 No. 60960-00

1.5 FCC and Industry Canada Compliance, U.S. and Canada

1.5.1 FCC Registration and Requirements

1.5.1.2 FCC Rules, Part 15

P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

1.5.1.3 FCC Rules, Part 68

FCC Part 68 Registration

Facility Interface Information

Manufacturer Port Facility Interface Code (FIC) REN Network Jack

P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

Disruption of the Network

Telephone Company Facility Changes

P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

Nonlive Voice Equipment

Newly Established Network Area and Exchange Codes

Equipment with Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002

Programmed Dialer Features

Connecting Off-premises Station Facilities

Equal Access Requirements

Electrical Safety Advisory

1.5.2 Industry Canada Compliance

P31003-H3110-M120-2-7631 (I.M.); G281-0726-01 (U.S.), August 2002